SIGNALS MANUAL: THE R-401 RADIO RELAY STATION

Document Type: 
Collection: 
Document Number (FOIA) /ESDN (CREST): 
CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5
Release Decision: 
RIPPUB
Original Classification: 
S
Document Page Count: 
248
Document Creation Date: 
December 23, 2016
Document Release Date: 
August 14, 2013
Sequence Number: 
1
Case Number: 
Publication Date: 
October 1, 1963
Content Type: 
REPORT
File: 
AttachmentSize
PDF icon CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5.pdf12.86 MB
Body: 
Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 TOR CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AGENCY This material contains intorttutien afiEstins the National Defense of the United States within the meaning of the Espionage Laws, 11_50X1 IS, U.S.C. Seca. 793 and 794, the transmission or revttiok obwilith iry manner to an unauthorized person Is prohibited by COUNTRY Poland REPORT SUEJEC; Signals Manual: The R-401 Radio DATE DISTR. 1 October 1963 Relay Station DATE OF INFO. PLACE & DATE ACQ. ?THIS IS UNEVALUATED NO. PAGES REFERENCES RD 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM INFORMATION. SOURCE GRADINGS ARE DEFINITIVE. APPRAISAL OF CONTENT IS TENTATIVE. .4 50X1 I. Attached is a Polish military manual authorized for use in the Polish Armed Forces on 26 February 1962 by Colonel ' Edward Holynski, Chief of the Signals Corps. The Polish classi- fication of the document is SECRET. ,,The R-401, which is of Soviet . production, is currently being int'rOduced into the Polish Armed50X1A-IUM Forces. ? S-E-C-R-R-T 50X1-H UM 5 4 OROUP 1 mectunrn Yaws AUTOMATIC DOW NonAm NO AND OrZLAW3IFICATIOH ITA117-1 I ARMY If NAVY L I AIR I TNSA ? DIA I I AID I 50X1 -HUM (Notot Washington distribution indicate's! by "X", Floid distribution by "*".) 3 , 2 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 .x1 SECRET ? Utt_S.S.R. Am/4ILARY 50X1 -HUM 'MINISTRY OF NATIONAL DEFENSE SECRET SIGNALS MANUAL THE R-401 RADIO RELAY STATION 0 PUBLICATION OF TEE ELNISTRY OF NATIONAL DEFENCE 1962 Warsaw, 26th February 1962. alDMI No. 022/Laczn. aa? I approve and introduce for use the " Signals Manual - The R-401 Radio Relay Station". CHEF OF THE CORPS OF SIGNALS 4.".. ? SECRET Golonel Edward HOLYNSKI GROUP 1 Excluded train automatic downgrading and declassification 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 N-S) r_nv.4 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? Chapter Chapter Chapter OW SECRET TABLE OF CONTENTS I. - Fundamentals of multi-channel communication with frequency division multiplexing. II, - Description of the station equipment. 14 Purpose of the station and basic tactical and technical data. 2. Modes of operation of the station, 3. Transceiver unit. 4.. Multiplexing unit, 5. Power supply unit. 6. Aerial and mast equipment. III. - Pperation of the R-401 station. 1. Protection of the station against damage. 2. Choice of site for deployment of the station. 3. Selection of the radio relay route. Selection of the operating frequencies. 5. Deployment and dismantling of the station. 6. Switching on, establishing communication, and switching off the station. . 7. Checking the readiness of the equipment for operation. 8. Use of the equipment when operating as a terminal station. 9, Use of the equipment when operating as an intermediate station. 10. Operation using the portable equipment. 11. Battery charging. 12. Instrument for the adjustment of the telegraph channels and relays. 13. Possible faults and Methods of their elimination. Chapter IV. - Measurement of the basic parameters of the station. 1. Measurement of the transmitter power. ' 2. Measurement of the aerial feeder efficiency. 3. Measurement of the receiver sensitivity. 4. Determination of the operating level setting error (the overall attenuation) in the telephone channels, by means of the station instruments. 5. Cross-talk measurement. 6. Telegraph distortion measurement. SECRET 50X1-HUM 41111111111/111w MI111111111? /APPENDICES ..... Page 5 12 12 21 26 41 64 73 77 77 77 82 85 85 91 99 109 121 126 128 130 133 137 137 138 138 139 140 142 50X1-HUN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? SECRET -3 APPENDICES I. Safety Regulations. 2. Method of Inspection and Technical Control of the R-4.(1 Radio Relay Station. 3. Voltage and Resistance Values in Blocks 1 and 2. 4. Power Consumption by the individual Circuits of one Half-Set of the Station. 5. Table of rated Voltages and Currents of Valves used in the Station. 6. Table showing the normal Current and Pulsation of the Rectified Voltage in Block 3. 7. Results of Control Measurements. 8, Fire Prevention Instructions for the R-401 Station. 9. block layout of the R-401 Radio Relay Station, 10. Diagram of Connections in Block 1. 11. Circuit Diagram of Transmitter. 12, List of Transmitter Components. 13. Circuit Diagram of the HF Stages of the Receiver. 14. List of Components of HF Stages of the Receiver. 15. Circuit diagram of the IF Stages of the Receiver, 16. List of Components of IF Stages of the Receiver. 17. Circuit Diagram of the Telephone Portion of thelifultiplexing Block. 18. List of Components of Telephone Portion of the Multiplexing Block. 19. Circuit Diagram of the Telegraphic Portion of Multiplexing Block. 20. List of Components of the Telegraphic Portion. of Multiplexing Block. 21. Circuit Diagram of Anti-Interference Filter. 22. List of Components of the Anti-Interference Filter. 23. Circuit Diagram of Rectifier Block. 24. List of Circuit List of Circuit List of Circuit List of Circuit List of Circuit Components 25. Diagram of 26. Components 27, Diagram of 28, Components 29. Diagram of 30. Components 31. Diagram of 32. Components 33. Diagram of R-401 Radio Relay Station. of Rectifier Block. the Line Circuit Converter0 of the Line Circuit Converter. Receiver Converter. of Transmitter Converter. Transmitter Converter. of Transmitter Converter. the Line Pane1. of the Line Panel. the Power Circuit of one Half-Set of the 34. List of Components of the Power Circuit of one Half-Set of the R-401 Radio Relay Station, 35. Circuit Diagram of the Charging Panel. 36. List of Components of the Charging Panel. 37. Circuit Diagram of the Mains Attachment. 38. List of Components of the Mains Attachment. 41111k SECRET 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? rkDeclassified Commeng 411101ECRET ? 4 - SOME ABBREVIATIONS 50X1-H UM 1. APCz Automatyczne podstrajanie dzestotliwosci. Automatic frequency control (AFC). 2. Dz Dzwonek. Bell, 3, FMCz Filtr malej czestotliwosci. Low frequency filter. 4. FP Filtr pasmnwy. Band pass filter. 5. FTg Filtr telegraficzny. Telegraph filter. 6. GZA Generator zewu akustycznego. Audio calling signal generator. 7. NKT Nikrotelefon, hicrotelephones telephone -handset. 8. N Neper. (1 Neper = 8.686 decibels). 9. OZA Odbiornik zewu akustycznego. Audio calling signal receiver. 10. P 11. PN 12. PO 13, TrR 14. URN 15, UR 16, WPCz 17, WWCz 18. WMCz 19, ZZ 20, TF 21, TG Przekaznik, Relay. Przekaznik nadawczy. Transmitting relay. Przekaznik offbiorczy. Receiving relay.. Transformator roznicowy. Differential transftrmer. (Hybrid coil). Uklad rozmowniczo wywolvwczy. "Talk - call" unit, Uklad rozwidleniowy. Hybrid junction unit. Wzmacniacz posredniej czestotliwosci. Intermediate frequency amplifier. Wzmacniacz wysokiej czestotliwosci. High frequency amplifier. Wzmacniacz malej czestotliwosci. Low frequency amplifier. Zmiennik zewu. Calling signal converter. Telefon(iczny). Telephong-ic). Telegraf(iczny). Telegraph(-ic), aikSECRET aibs- 50X1-H UM 50X1-HUM in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 11111,SECRET -5 50X1 -HUM CHAPTER I FUNDANENTALS OF MULTI-CHANNEL CONMUNICATION WITH FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING Communication by means Cf a radio-relay is a novel method of providing communication by radio, which differs substantially due to its features and possibilities from the previously used methods. The design of the radio-relay equipment permits the use of the radio-relay Channels in connection with wire communication channels. DUB to this possibility, a complox communication system can be set up, where the same terminal equipment is used for both wire and radio links. With such a system a subscriber, whose telephone set is connected to the exchange, can talk through the wire links, or through the radio links, or through mixed wire and radio links. Therefore the application of the radio-relay raises the quality of the radio communication up to the level of a good quality wire communication, at the same time preserving the fundamental advantage of radio communication, namely good manoeuverability. 2. To obtain a more efficient use of the wire lines for long distance communication, wide use is made of multiplexing (multi-channeling). This means a simultaneous transmission of many conversations along a common path. The multiplexing of radio links for the simultaneous transmission of several conversations is widely applied in the radio-relay communication. The principles of multi-channel communication by means of the radio-relay with frequency division multiplexing will now be examined, taking as an example the radio-relay station R-401. 3. The frequency band transmitted by the R-401 radio-relay station is contained within the limits of 300 to 15000 q/s. Within this band there are located two telephone channels, and two telegraph channels. The first telephone channel is the natural voice frequency channel. The second telephone channel - the carrier frequency channel - is an ultrasonic7100, frequency channel, operating on the principle of the suppressed-carrier /transmission. SECRET mumarso 50X1 -HUN Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 1 / ? , Declassified arSECRET 50X1-HUM transmission. Both telegraph Channels are also ultrasonic. In these channels, the telegraph pulses are transmitted with the aid of frequency modulated oscillations. 40 The suppressed-carrier transmission method of telephone , _-_-_ conversations consists of shifting the natural voice frequency band into the _ . _ range of higher frequencies, and then transmitting it through the radio- relay link. This is accomplished by special processes taking place on the transmitting side, On the receiving side? the frequency band is submitted to a reverse process, resulting jn the recovery of the original voice frequency band of the telephone signal. 5. The process of shifting the voice frequency band into the higher frequency range on the transmitting side is known as moaulationl and the reverse process on the receiving side is known as de-mcdulation. 6. It is known that the telephone speech is sufficiently intelligible even when the audio frequency band is reduced to a band contained within the limits of 400-2500 c/s. An example of the relative amplitudes of sinusoidal components of the telephone conversation frequency band is given in Figure 1 a. 7. When the oscillations of a special oscillator (the sub-carrier frequency oscillator) are modulated with a signal of the above frequency band, the amplitude modulated oscillations frequency spectrum will contain the following frequencies: sub-carrier frequency (the oscillator frequency), and two side-bands (Figure i b). 8. The width of each side band equals the width of the modulating signal band, and the particular frequencies are the sum of, or difference between the oscillator frequency and the frequencies of the modulating signal. For example the sub-carrier frequency of the R-401 radio-relay station is fpn = 70..2.2Ls. Hence the lower side band contains frequencies lying between 4900 and 7000 c/s (from fpn 2500 c/s to fpn7400 c/s), and the upper side-band contains frequencies lying between 7800 and 9900 c/s (from fpn + 400 to fpn + 2500 ?M. 1111111111.111. 50X1 cFrral? /From. 50X1-HUM in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 I 1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A03100001730151-0M / / / ? ? OW/SECRET ?7-. 9. From Figure 1 b it follows that the distribution of amplitudes in the upper side-band corresponds exactly to the amplitudes distribution within the natural band of the telephone speech. In the lower side-band the higher frequency components correspond to the lower frequency components of the natural band, and vice-versa - the lower frequency components of the lower side-band correspond to the higher frequency oomponents of the natural band. In other words, the distribution of the component oscillations amplitudes within the lower side-band is in inverse ratio to the distribution in the natural band. 10. Frequently, to make the best use of the frequency band which can be transmitted by the radio-relay, only one of the side-bands is used for the transmission of speech. In the R-401 radio-rely only the lower side- band is transmitted. The sub-carrier frequency serves here only for the purpose of producing the amplitude modulated oscillations, The sub-carrier frequency oscillations, together with the upper side-band components are subsequently attenuated by a filter. The telephony system based on the principle of the single side-band, suppressed-carrier transmission presents the advantage that the frequency band width, required for the transmission of the speech signal, is equAl to the signal band width only. 11. The frequency band transmitted by the R-401 radio-relay station is shown in Figure 2, 12. The blodk diagram shown in Figure 3 explains the principle of frequency division multiplexing in the radio-relay link. 13. The signal from the subscriberls microphone in the first telephone channel, passes through the amplitude limiter OA, and is applied to the low frequency filter FIA0z. Through this filter pass only frequencies below 2500 c/s. This eliminates the possibility of interference in the remaining channels during the operation of the first telephone channel. 14. The signal from the microphone of the second telephone channel, after passing through the amplitude limiter OA, is applied to the modulator. - /Abkthe 50X1 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 , r 1 T 1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010-001-'5" JIV1 / Ai., btLICL I ? - 8-. At the output of the modulator is a band-pass filter FP1) -which transmits only the lower side-band frequencies (4900-7000 c/s) and substantially attenuates all the other frequencies, eliminating the possibility of interference in the other channels, From the output of the filters FMOz and FPI signals of both telephone channels are applied to the input of the modulation amplifier of the. -? ??,_.. ? _ _ . . 15. The amplitude limiters OA at the input of each telephone channel limit the level of the incoming signal to a definite value in order to prevent the overloading of the following channels, and to reduce the , possibility of cross-talk between the Channels. As the limiters are non- linear elements, they cause signal distortions in the telephone channels. However, it turns out in practice that the non-linear distortions caused by the limiters affect much less the quality of communication, than cross-talk between the channels in the absence of limiters.. On the block diagram a dotted line is drawn around the second telephone channel elements which in the carrier telephony equipment are known as the ',;ransmitter. 16. The block diagram explaining the principle of separation of particular channels on the receiving side) is shown in Figure 4. 17. The low frequency filter FMCzi? located at the input of the first telephone channel, transmits to the subscriber, from the whole frequency band of the received signal (Figure 2)0 only the first Channel frequencies (natural voice frequency band). It does not pass frequencies. of the remaining channels. 18. The band-pass filter FP10 located at the input of the second telephone channel, transmits from the whole frequency band received, only frequencies corresponding to the lower side-band. of this channel, i.e, only the band 4-900-7000 q/s. Signals of the pass band frequency enter the de- modulator (Dem.), where they are transformed into the natural telephone speech frequency band. The demodulator consists here of a cuproxide rectifier, which is a non-linear element. lift-SECRET 411111111111101 41111114:19. 0 ? ? ? ? ? ? 6 50X1 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? alp SECRET 50X1 -HUM 194 When to the non-linear element is applied a signal containing lower side-band frequencies (fb), and a sub-carrier frequency fpn = 7400 c/ss generated by a local oscillator, then at the output of this element there appear, beside the fundamental frequencies, also their harmonics, and the combined frequencies of fb and fila (Figure 5). The frequency components, which are the difference of f n flo, correspond to the voice frequendy band transmitted by the second telephone channel. The low frequency band filter (low pass filter) FMCz2 at the output of the demodulator attenuates all the higher frequencies beyond the voice frequency band transmitted through the second telephone channel. From the output of this filter, the signal containing voice frequencies, after being amplified by the amplifier Ws is sent to the subscriber. On the block diagram a dotted line is drawn around the part of the circuit which in the carrier telephony system is known as the receiver. 20. In Figure 6 is shown a simplified block diagram of the .second telephone channel of the R-401. station.. For the transition from the four- terminal multiplex system into the two-terminal subscriber's line is used a differential transformer 2Tybrid coi27. The principle of its operation is as follows, 21. The currents of the natural voice frequency band from the demodulator flow through the primary winding of the differential transformer TrR into the sUbscriber's line, and simultaneously into the balancing network Rn. The balancing network is so designed that its impedance is equal to the input impedance of the subscriber's line. Therefore currents through the balancing network and through the subscriber's line are equal. As these currents flow through the primary winding in opposite directions, the resultant magnetic flux in the core of the differential transformer TrR is zero. In consequence, no electromotive force is induced, in the secondary winding of the transformers which is connected to the modulr,tor Input, and the telephone signals directed to the subsdriber do net enter into one's awn transmitter input. On the other hand, currents from the OW SECRET /subscr 50X1 4,06*01100 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 'Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 4IP 4111P4 SECRET - 10 - 50X1 -HUM subscriber microphone flaw in the same direction through both halves of the differential transformer primary winding. An EMS is therefore induced in the secondary winding, which is then applied to the input of the modulator. 22, The above multiplexing method- is used in the R-401 station. 23. We will now examine the principle of telegraphy with the aid of the frequency modulated ospillations.as used in both telegraph channels of - - the R-401 station. The positive telegraph pulses arriving from the line develop alternating current signals of a frequency fl, and the negative pulses, or zero current pulses develop signals of a frequency f2. Conversion of the d.c. pulses into the a. c, signals is done with the aid of the transmitting relcv which controls the generator oscillations, At the instant of the transition of the transmitting relay arm from ane contact to the other, the generator frequency has an average value of fo = f1+f2 . 2 24, During the transmission of positive telegraph pulses, the frequency fo is increased by the amount ft, and during the transmission of the negative or zero current pulses, the frequency drops by the 'same amount. The amount of the frequency increase ft is known as the frequency deviation of the generator. In this manner, by changing the frequency of the generator oscillations, the telegraph signals can be transmitted, without interrupting the oscillations of the generator. 25. The width of the telegraph channel frequency band with frequency modulated oscillations depends upon the coefficient of modulation (modulation index) mf which is expressed as the ratio: ' ft 2A ft mf= ----77- where: F = fundamental telegraph signalling frequency, equal to one half of the telegraph signalling speed expressed in bauds. 26. In the R-401 station the frequency deviation of both telegraph channels is the same, and equals A. ft = 300 q/s. As the frequency deviation is always constant, the frequency band width is determined by the highest telegraph signalling speed which, for the telegraph channels of the 411111. crDFT /R-401 50X1 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 I) Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 50X1 -HUM R-401 station, equals 50 bauds. At this signalling speed, the frequency band occupied by each telegraph channel is 800 c/s. 270 The block diagram of the circuit converting the d.c, telegraph signal pulses into frequency modulated oscillations is shown in Figure 3. Pulses from the telegraph transmitters connected to the inputs of the channels, activate the transmitting relays EN, which in turn control the oscillation frequency of the generator 0.1 or 0.2, 28. The frequency modulated oscillation5 pass from the generator through the band-pass filter FP2 (or FP3 of the second channel) into the input of the modulatOr amplifier of the transmitter. 29, The spectrum of the telegraph and telephone frequency channels, and their position within the frequency band transmitted by the R.-401 station, is shown in Figure 2. The frquency bands of the individual channels of the station are so distributed along the frequenCy spectrum as to minimise the possibility of cross-talk between the channels. 30. The block diagram of the frequency modulated telegraph signal receiving circuit is shown in Figure 4. The frequency modulated oscillations arriving from the receiver, pass through the filter FP2 ,(or FP3) their amplitude is limited, and they are then amplified. The purpose of the amplitude limiter was discussed above. 31. The amplitude limited and amplified frequency mpaulated oscillations corresponding to2the telegraph signals- are applied to the frequency detector Aiscriminato2.7 D, composed of two resonant circuits connected in series, The resonant frequency of one circuit equals fo 4. ft, and the resonant frequency of the second circuit equals fo - ft. With, the aid of this detector the frequency modulated oscillations aro converted into amplitude modulated oscillations. They are then rectified by the cuproxide rectifiers Pr. The rectified currents flow through the windings of the polarised receiving relay PO whose arm reproduces the d.c0 telegraph signal pulses, which are then transmitted through the line to the telegr-.1b-,--2:-. ux1 -HUM receivers e 50X1 -HUM SECRET /CHAPIER ? 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 V) Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 411!IISECRET - 12 - CHAPTER II DESCRIPTION OF THE STATION EQUIPMENT 1. Pur ose of the Station and basic Tactical and Technical Data 50X1-HUM 32, The R-401 radio-relay station serves primarily for the.mainte- nance of communication between command posts, and as a branch link from large, multi-channel radio-relay stations. In addition, the station can be used as an incermediate station for the wire lines, and also for other purposes. Equipment of the station 33. The equipment of the R-401 radio-relay station is located in a special body of the GAZ,-63 truck (Figure 7). The weight of the truck) including the body, the equipment, the accessories and ,fuel9 is 5400 kgs. 34. Each radio-relay station is equipped with two identical half- sets. Each half-set is composed of the following basic assemblies: the transmitter-receiver unit (Block 1) the multiplexing unit (Block 2)9 the rectifier unit (Block 3)9 the line panel, the battery charging panel, the petrol-driven generator for battery charging, six storage batteries 5 NI-45, the aerial, the mast with guy-ropes, and two coaxial aerial cables ffeeder.17. In addition, the station outfit also includes: an instrument for the adjustment of channels and telegraph relays, a mains supply attachment, a telephone instrument TAI-43, spare parts, and auxiliary equipment. 35; The blocks 19 2 and 3 of each half-set are fixed in a metal rack (Figure 8). The racks are attached to the table and to the rear wall of the truck body with the aid of shock absorbers. The lay-out of the. equipment in the truck is shown in Figure 9. 411111ECRET / 36, 9684 50X1-HUM I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ri) Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? WPSECRET - 13 - 50X1 -HUM 36. The design of the equipment and the wiring of the station makes. possible speedy dismantling of the equipment and removing it for operation outside the truck, and also its speedy replacement in the truck. The removable equipment consists of: the transmitter-receiver unit, the multiplexing unit, two storage batteries 5 1110-45 the aerial in its packing) a mast hoist, a set of guy-ropes in their packing, the mast components in . their packing, the line panel, a telephone hand set, and connecting cables in their packing. When removing the equipment? the units, 1. and 2, and the line panel shoold be placed in a special cover.. The weight of the removable equipment (Figure 10) is about 200 kgs. Basic Equipment Data - RaKE:3_2f Communication 37. In a moderately undulating, afforested and flat terrain, the range of communication between two stations is up to 45 kns. With two more relay (intermediate) stations it is possible to Communicate over a range of 120 kms. In a flat open terrain the range between the stations can be increased. 38. It, should be borne in mind that when using intermediate (retransmission) stations, each retransmitting section extending the radio-relay route causes an increase of the noise in individual channels. Therefore, in order to ensure normal conditions of operation of the radio- relay, it is necessary to increase the received signal levels at the individual stations. This can be obtained by reducing the distance between the stations, as compared with the distance between two terminal stations (without any relay stations). This explains the fact that with two relay stations the range of communication is less than treble the range between two terminal stations. 1:13_7e.eassy_s:4m 39. ?The station operates in the metric wave range (4.55 - 4.29 m.), 50X1 -HUM / at frequencies... 4111WIECRE'T 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 111110" SECRET ""' 50X1 50X1-HUM at frequencies from 66 to 69.975 Eb/s. This range is subdivided into 54 fixed operating wavelengths, at 75kc. intervals. Operating wave NO. 1 corresponds to the frequency of 66 likVs. 400 The tuning assembly (of the transmitter and of the receiver), which has a scale and 4 pointer, serves for tuning the station and for setting it to any desired operating wavelength. 41. The station provides the means for simultaneous duplex operation with ',:wo telephone channels, ani two telegraph. channels. 42. The output of each telephone channel can be connected to a two- wire (single pair) or to a four-wire (double pair) line. In other words, the transmission and the reception in each channel can be carried out either through a common circuit, or through two separate circuits. In both cases in each telephone channel, the magneto calling signals can pass over in both directions. There is also provision for a rlecondary multiplexing, ? ..... (re-multiplexing) of the telephone channels by the telegraph channels with ? the aid of the carrier telegraphy equipment type B-313. As the second telephone channel is a carrier channel, its multiplexing with the aid of the P-313 equipment results in a slightly inferior communication, as compared with the first telephone channel. The telephone channels can also be used for the transmission Of fixed images with the aid of tele-photography equipment. 43. The telegraph channels can work with uni-directional pulses of the telegraph set ST-35, as well as with the bi-directional pulses of the Baudot telegraph system. With the aid of the differential line trans- formers, supplied with the station, it is possible to operate the telegraph communication through two-wire lines connected to the telephone channels. 50X1-HUN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 441110 SECRET - 15 50X1 -HUM 44. The multiplexing equipment of the station permits an external multiplexing of the radio-line with the aid of the carrier telephony sets P-310 and P-3121 When the external multiplexing sets are being used, the second telephone channel and both telegraph channels are switched off. The firs telephone channel operates. as usual. 45. When the station operates with its own multiplexing equipment, any channel can be extracted from the intermediate "station. The relaying Lye-transmission/ of the remaining channels is carried out on low. frequencies (natural or carrier frequencies). During external multiplexing operation witi the aid of the sets P-310 and P-312, only the first telephone channel r- -; can be extracted from the intermediate LyepeateIr station. 46. The station telephone channel outputs can be connected to the telephone channels of the wire or radio-relay systeMs. Characteristics (s ecifications of the channels 47. The basic characteristic values of a telephone channel are: the rated input and output levels, the intelligible cross-talk level (from other channels), the magnitude of the non-linear distortions and frequency iiineax7 distortions, and the noise level at the channel output. 48. The noise level in the radio-relay telephrne channel depends upon the high frequency signal levels received by each station, and upon the number of stations in any given link. 49. At the above given ranges between the stations, the psophometrie noise level in the telephone channels, including the cross-talk level, does not exceed 5 mV, 50. With a two-wire input to the telephone channels, and at the input level of - 1 lq&eper.g, the absolute cross-talk level over one repeater section does not exceed - 7 Nb With three repeater sections there is practically no cross-talk. The operation of the telegraph channels 50X1 -HUM IOW SECRET / (both am channels,.., 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 - Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 50X1 50X1-HUM (both own channels and the channels obtained as a result of the secondary multiplexing with the aid of the P-313 unit), does not in practice cause an interference in the telephone channels. 51. Each telephone channel transmits a speech frequency band ftom WO to 2500 c/s, with an attenuation of the extreme frequencies of this band not exceeding 0.4 N. 52. The non-linear distortion coefficient of the telephone channels with two-wire input, and an input level of - 1 1T, does not exceed loy; for one rcpeater section. 53. The non-linear distortion coefficient of the first telephone channel with a four-wire input (42)1 and an input level of - 004N does not exceed 470 for one repeater section. 54. The input and output impedence of the radio-relay telephone channels is 600 ohms. The rated levels of the telephone cnannels, measured at a frequency of 800 c/s9 are as follows: - for a two-wire input: input level - 1.0 ltio (285 MV); output level - 2.0 El, (105 10); - for a four-wire input with a magneto calling signal repeater (4TF)g the input and the output levels are - 1.24-N (190 mV); for a four-wire input without a magneto calling signal repeaterr the input and the output levels are - 064 N, (519 mV), 55. At the rated supply Voltages it is possible to adjust the attenuation of the telephone channels with the aid of the measuring instru- ments, with an accuracy of 0.2 N. 56. The quality Of the telegraph channels can essentially be determined by two parameters - the maximum telegraph signalling speed, and the coefficient of the telegraph signals distortions. The telegraph channels of the R-401 station make it possible to telegraph speed at a rate of 50 bauds. At this speed, the distortions of the telegraph signals 001. SECRET 50X1-HUMI / for a link.... 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1-HUM ? 40SECRET - 17-- ? 50X1-HUM for a link consisting of two intermediate repeater stations and two terminal stations, do not exceed 10%. 57. The lack of constancy of the frequency response from 3.5 to 15 kc/s., with external multiplexing does not exceed, for one repeater section, the limits of + 0.2 to - 0.5 N9 in respect of the reference level at 9 kc/s. The rated levels of the channel with external multiplexing ares input level - + 0.4 N; output level - not less than - 2 N. The input and the output impedances of this channel are 1000 ohms. The transmitter output power 58. The output power of the transmitter at rated power supply voltages, and average values of the output stage valve parameters, is not less than 2 W. With the batteries voltage drop to 11 V9 oi with the mains voltage drop of 10%, the transmitter output 'power should be not less than 1.3 W. .Receiver sensl.tivltz 59. The receiver sensitivity of the station for both telephone channels, at a frequency deviation of 6 kc/s, at the rated output level, and a signal-to-noise ratio of 20 at the telephone channel output, should be not less than 2 microvolts. With the power supply voltages fluctuating within the limits of ? 10% the receiver sensitivity remains practically constant. Receiver selectivity, 60. The image signal attenuation is not less than 10 N for the first intermediate frequency, and not less than 11 N for the second intermediate frequency. 61. The attenuation of the intermediate frequency signals is not less than 11.5 N. -1111111,SECREIT / 62. 50X1-HUM 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? -411WSECRET - 18 - 50X1 -HUM 62. When the receiver is de-tuned from 75 kc/s to 300 kc/s, the sensitivity drops not less than 9.2 N. When the receiver is de-tuned over 300 kc/s,,the sensitivity drops not less than 11.5 N. The band=pasg Vi] of 0.5 is 48 kc/s. Freguencz stability of the receiver and the transmitter 63. The frequency stability of the transmitter and the receiver ensures the establishing of the communication without searching for the correspondent, and also the maintenance of communication without the necessity of manual re-tuning. 64. The cumulative error of the scale calibration and the tuning of the transmitter and receiv3r to the operating frequency does not exceed ? 6 kc/s. When the valves of the master oscillator, or the modulator in the transmitter, or the valves of the heterodyne oscillator, or the auto- matic frequency control stage in the receiver, have been changed - it is necessary to re-calibrate the equipment, with the aid of the quartz cali- brator of the station. 65. The correction of the receiver and transmitter calibration should be repeated periodically during the technical inspections of the station. 66. After the switching on of the transmitter and receiver, during the warming up period of the valves and circuit elements of the transmitter master oscillator, and the receiver first heterodyne oscillator, their frequency is changing. About 15 minutes after the switching on, the fre- quency of the transmitter and of the heterodyne oscillator of the receiver become stabilized, and do not vary any more. The de-tuning of the trans- mitter and of the heterodyne oscillator of the receiver one minute after switching on does not exceed 3 kc/s. 67. When the power supply voltages fluctuate within the limits of 105"0 from the rated value, the frequency fluctuations of the transmitter and of the first heterodyne oscillator do not .exceed 3.5,Jcols. SECRET / 68. 50X1 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? -iii SECRET - 19 - 50X1-HUM 68. The thermal frequency factor (TWCz) of the transmitter and of the first heterodyne oscillator of the receiver does not exceed - 4,>(10. 69. ,After communication has been established, the automatic frequency control circuit of the receiver should be switched on. This reduces the receiver de-tuning, in respect of the opposite station trans- mitter, almost ,six times, if de-tuning does not exceed one half of the receiver band-pass width (_ 25 kc/s). The Aerial apilasp.siat 70. Por the transmission and reception of high frequency signals, the R-401 station uses two separate "Yazd." type aerials with mutually perpendicular polarization, assembled as a single cruciform unit. The horizontal and the vertical aerials, which form one unit, are installed on top of a collapsible mast 14.5 m. high. 71. The beam width angle of the horizontal radiation pattern main lobe, measured between two half-power points is: - for the vertical aerial - about 750 (Figure 73); - for the horizontal aerial - about 550 (Figure 74). The directional gain of the aerial in respect of a half-wave dipole is not less than 6 db. The reciprocal attenuation between the horizontal and the vertical aerials is not less than 38 db. 72. Aerials are connected to the receiver and the transmitter by co- axial feeders type R1-1, 25 m. long. Power Supply 73. The station-can be powered from storage batteries, or from 127/220 V a.c. mains. Each half-sot is equipped with three groups of storage batteries, consisting of two batteries each, type 5 NIT-45. 74. One group of storage batteries can supply continuously one half-set for 8 hours. 4116 SECRET / 75. 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET - 20 - 50X1 -HUM 75. Power drawn by one half-set from storage batteries isz - during operation of?the whole half-set - not more than 75 W; - during stand-by duty (only receiver is energised) - not more than 35W. 76. Power drawn by one Half-set from the mains is: - during operation of the whole half-set - not more than 150 W; - during stand-by duty - not more than 65 W. 77. During operation of both half-sets at maximum load (calling, scale lighting, truck indoor lighting) the total power drawn by the station from a.c. mains is not more than 340 W. 78. Fluctuations of the supply voltages within t 10% of the rated value do not affect the normal operation of the station. The storage batteries are charged by means of a mobile petrol-driven generator, type PES-0.75. 79. The anode and screen grid circuits of the valves, and the line circuits of the Baudot,telegraph sets, are supplied from: - a vibrator converter, when using the battery power supply; - rectifiers, when using the a.c. mains supply. 20.12yment and dismantlinp of the Station 80. The time required for the deployment and for dismantling of one intermediate station (erection and dismantling of two aerial and mast assemblies) by operating personnel consisting of 5 men, does not exceed one hour. 81. The design of the aerial and mast equipment permits the deploy- ment'of the station on relatively small sites, and also at night. Other data of the Station 82. (1) The dimensions of the truck and body: - length 5550 mm. width 2240 mm. height 2990 mm. L-1 ZEndistinct cop/ /( 50X1 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 PerSECRET - 21 - (2) Total petrol supply for the truck: - petrol tank under the seat - 90 litres; - petrol tank under the body - 105 litres; (3) Of this: The total number of radio valves in one half-set is 30. in the transmitter: 6 valves (5 type 12Z111, and one type 4PI1J); in the receiver: 16 valves (12ZII); in the multiplexing unit: 8 valves (12ZI). 50X1 -HUM 2, Modes of 02.9ration of the Station 83. The R-401 station can operate in three alternative ways: as a terminal station, as an intermediate 27epeatei7 station, zJid as a main repeater station. In addition, any half-set can operate on stand.- by duty (only the receiver operates). 22.92:ation as a terminal station 84. A block diagram of the station operating as a terminal station is shown in Figure 12, ? 85. The subscriber's telephones in the telephone channels are connected though wire lines to the hybrid junction unit UR. The first channel subscriber signal passes through the hybrid junction unit UR, through the amplitude limiter OA, through the low frequency filter of the pass band 0.4 to 2.5 -kc/s, and is ap lied to the modulation amplifier of the radio-relay transmitter (Bloc11). Signals from this channel are applied to the input of the modulation amplifier without frequency conversion. 86. The second channel subscriber's signal passes through the hybrid junction unit to the input of the multiplexing unit transmitter, where the input signal frequencies are converted into higher frequencies. After ? frequency conversion, and after passing through the 4.9 to 7.0 kc/s band- pass filter, the signal, which now contains only the lower side-band 41111111kSECRET 50X1-HUM / frequencies... 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? frequencies: is applied to the input of the modulation amplifier of the 50X1-HUM radio-relay transmitter. 87. The d.c. telegraph pulses, from the telegraph instruments connected to the telegraph channels of the station, are applied to the transmitting relay PN control the frequency of oscillations of the generator G2 in the first channel, and of the generator G3 in the second channel respectively. When the applied telegraph pulses are negative (or no-current pulses), the frequency of the geLerator G2 oscillations in the first telegraph channel is 8.5 kc/s. When the pulses are positive (or current pulses), the oscillation frequency is 9.1 kc/s. The second telegraph channel generator G3 generates oscillations of the frequency 12.2 and 12.8. kc/s respectively. 88. The frequency of oscillations of the generators G2 and G are in 3 this way modulated during the operation of the telegraph instruments. 89. The frequency modulated oscillations pass through the 8.4 to 9.2 kc/s band-pass filter in the first channel, and through the 12.1 to 12.9 kc/s band-pass filter in the second channel, into the input of the modulation amplifier of the transmitter. ? 90. The signals of particular channels, shown in Figure 2, after being amplified to a suitable level in the modulation amplifier, modulate the high frequency oscillations of the master oscillator in the transmitter. After further amplification, these oscillations are applied to the trans- mitting aerial through a coaxial line. 91. The high frequency signals received from the other station are fed through the coaxial line into the input of the receiver (Block 1). In the receiver they are amplified and then submitted to a conversion process in order to re-create the signals modulating the radio-relay transmitter frequency of the frequency spectrum shown in Figure 2. After 0411111bSECRET 50X1-HUM / the conversion, 0004 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 41111,SECRET 50X1-HUM the conversion, the signal passes from the output of the receiver into a system of filters (Block 2) which distribute the component frequency bands into particular channels. 90. The signal containing the natural speech frequency band of the first telephone channel, after passing through the low frequency 0.4 to 2.5 kc/s band-pass filter, through the amplifier W$ and through the hybrid junction unit UR, is sent to the subscriber. 93. The second telephone channel frequenv band, separated by the 4.9 to 7,0 kc/s band-pass filter, is applied to the receiver of the multi- plexing unit, where it is converted into the original telephone speech frequency band. After the conversion, the signal passes through the low- pass filter, through the hybrid junction unit UR, and then is sent to the subscriber. 94. . In order to carry out a telephone conversation from own station, with the other radio-relay station or with a telephone exchange, use is made of the talk-call unit. This unit can be connected to the appropriate telephone channel. 95. The frequency modulated signals of the first telegraph channel, after passing through the 8.4 to 9.2. kc/s band-pass filter for the first telegraph channel, or after passing through the 12.1 to 12.9 kc/s band-pass filter for the second telegraph channel, enter the appropriate telegraph signal receiver, where they are converted into d.c. pulses. These pulses pass through the windings of the polarised receiving reJays PO. The arms of the receiving relays reproduce the d.c. pulses, and transmit these pulses through the line to the receiving telegraph instruments, 96. With external multiplexing with the aid of the carrier telephony sets P-310 and P-312, the R-401 station can operate only as a terminal station in a four-wire systems i.e., with the separation of directions of transmitting and receiving. In this case, the station should be connected 50X1-HUN / as a terminal..:. 411111111111MRL 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A03100001000115 ? ECRET ? 24 ? 50X1-HUM 50X1-HUM as a terminal station with external multiplexing. 97. The block diagram of the external multiplexing equipment connec- tions is shown in Figure 13. This figure shows that in this case the first telephone channel operation is similar to the operation with internal multi- plexing equipment. On the trarismittlng side, the external multiplexing equipment is connected to the input of the radio-relay transmitter modulation amplifier through a vide-band transformer Tr6, and on the receiving side, it is connected with the output of the receiver through the wide-band trans- former .Tr7 (Block 1). 0 eration as an interme412,i2jrepeater)sstation. The block diagram of the station when operating as intermediate 98. station (repeater station) is shown in Figure 14. In this uase all the channels of the station are connected for re-transmission (repeater) operation. 99. As the station must re-transmit signals simultaneously in both , directions, both half-sets must operate. The receivers and the. transmitters of both half-sets are operating simultaneously, and in addition both tele- phone channels are switched on for reception, so that the calling signals can be received, and it is possible to cheek (monitor) the telephone channels for quality of communication. The telegraph channels are connected for re- transmission, but their power supply SOUTOOS are not switched on. .100. For the re-transmission of channels a four-wire system is used. From the receiver output of one half-set, signals of all the channels are applied to the transmitter input of the second half-set through the filters of the respective channels. When a calling signal comes in through an telephone channel, the intermediate station operator switches this channel to the terminal station operation, and connects the "talk-call" unit URW, which allows him to carry out the conversation. SECRET 50X1-HUM / 101. 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 111VSECRET 25 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM 101. The block diagram of an intermediate station with external multiplexing using the carrier telephony sets P-310 and P-312, is shown in Figure 15. For re-transmission of a channel with external multiplexing, the second telephone channel and both telegraph channels of each half-set are disconnected. There is no change in the re-transmission of the first telephone channel, as shown in the diagram in Figure 14. For channel re-transmission with external multiplexing a four-wire system is used. In each half-set, the signals of this channel pass through a wide-band trans- forner. Operation as a main re eater station 102. An intermediate. (repeater) station is called the main repeater station when some of the channels are extracted for local use. In this case the extracted telephone and telegraph channels are reconnected at the inter- mediate station for terminal operation, (In Figure 14 these connections are shown with broken lines). Telephone and telegraph channels which are not extracted, operate in the re-transmission system. (In Figure 14 connections for this case are shown with a continuous line). The "talk,- call" unit of each half-set of the main repeater station permits conversation through the extracted channel, and also monitoring of the re-transmission channels. Station connected for st.11=hy_yestplilpja 103. In addition to the modes of operation described above, any half- set of the terminal or intermediate station can be connected for reception only. In this case only the receiver of the radio-relay and both telephone channels are in operation, so that it is possible to receive the calling signal from the distant station. 104. When an audio frequency signal (800 c/s) is received, the receiver of the audio calling signal OZA in one of the telephone channels wil 50X1 -HUM / come into... 50X11 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 50X1-HUM come into operation and will energise the bell. On hearing the bell, the operator switches on the half?set (switches on his transmitter), and answers the cell of the distant station, 3. Transceiver Unit 105. In the transceiver unit (Block 1) are located the following basic elements: the radio transmitter, the radio receiver, and the vibrator converters of the transmitter and the receiver. The description of ea ;h. element is given below. The voltages and currents required for the 3upply of the particular circuits, and the operating data for the valves of the transceiver unit are given in Appendices 4 and 5. The nonstruction of the unit 106. The transceiver unit is assembled on a siluminum cast base, with the front panel attached to it with bolts. 107. The external view of this unit is shown in Figures 17$ 18, 19 and 20. 108. The individual elements of the unit are assembled in separate partitions divided into several compartments. The design of the unit permits the rapid replacement of any of the transmitter and receiver valves. 109. The transceiver unit honsing is made of duraluminium sheet. In the rear wall of the housing there are holes for the cable connectors, and on the side walls ? holes giving access to the semi?variable capacitors 5rimmers27 serving for frequency correction fine tuninI of the transmitter and the receiver, and also to the potentiometers serving for the adjustment of the ANzrA-F.97 circuit. 110. The size of the transceiver unit including the housing is: 370X215g415 mm. Weight of the unit: 26 kg. / The transmitter 50X1-HUM 50X1 , Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 JM ? JC%?11C I 27 The transmitter 111. The station transmitter is assembled in a separate frame. Access to all the elements of the transmitter is possible without removal of the frame from the chassis of the unit. The transmitter dial is fixed directly on the shaft of its tuning Mechanism. The hairline of the scale is fixed to the front panel of Block 1. 112. On tuning the transmitter, the rotary motion of the dial is changed by means of .a suitable threaded shaft into the progressive motion of 411111 the tuning elements. ? 113. Master oscillator tuning within the frequency range i9 obtained by varying the distributed capacity 035 of the oscillator grid circuit coil. This capacitance is varied by the movement of a ceramic core of high di- electric constant ermittivitil inside the coil. Circuits of all the other stages are tuned inductively. Inductance of these circuits is varied by means of copper rings slid inside the coils. All the circuits are tuned simultaneously with the aid of a tuning mechanism driven by a knob. 114. The block diagram of the transmitter is shown in Figure 21. Each stage of the transmitter will be examined in turn. Master oscillator 115. The master oscillator is an electron-coupled oscillator using the valve 12ZI.1, (L-3). The basic circuit of the master oscillator is shown in Figure 22. 116. The electron-coupled oscillator circuit makes it possible to obtain a relatively high degree of stability in a valve oscillator. The frequency of the generated osciallations is determined by the grid circuit L11 - C35' This is a circuit of a high quality and of a high parameter constancy. Coil L (like all the coils in the transmitter circuits) is 11 wound on a ceramic form, on which the individual windings have been made by the silver spraying method). IMPSECRET / 117, 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 50X1-HUM 117. Coil L11 b too-ether with the coupling capacitor 0 34 is placed inside a screening cup, hermetically sealed against humidity. In order to reduce the effect of the valve upon the circuit frequency, the circuit is coupled with the grid by a small capacitance of C34 . 2 pF (wiring capaci? tance). The semi?variable capacitor 032 serves for transmitter frequency correction after a replacement of the master oscillator valve. The same capacitor is also used for frequency correction after a replacement of the frequency modulator valve. 118. In order to utilise the power of the high frequency oscillations, to the anode of the valve is connected another resonant circuit: L6 ? C23 ? 024 located in a separate compartment of the frame. This circuit is coupled with the grid circuit through the electron stream within the master oscillator valve. The anode circuit is connected with the anode of the' valve through two separating capacitors 022 and C25 and the anode voltage is supplied through the choke L27. This is a typical circuit for a shunt fed valve. 119. The cathode of the master osciallator is at a high frequency potential in respect to the ground, and therefore the cathode as well as the heater filament are de?coupled for the high frequencies with the aid of the chokes L8, L, and L10. Capacitors 0281 C29, C30, and 031 are the blocking capacitors. Resistor R18 gives automatic bias for the control grid of the valve, developed as a voltage drop due to the grid current. 120. Resistors R15 and R16 reduce the anode and the screen grid voltages respectively. The screen grid is grounded for the high frequency currents through the capacitor 026. 121. Resistor R16 serves also for checking the master oscillator valve operation. The voltage drop developed across this resistor by the anode current, is apolied through the resistor R17 and the switch W-3 to the terminals of the measuring instrument located on the front panel of the transceiver unit, WSECRT 50X1-HUM / Separator 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 29 50X1-HUM 122. The separator uses the valve 12ZIt (L-2)9 which is shunt fed (Figure 23). This stage serves for the amplification of the high frequency oscillations to the value required for the control of the power amplifier. This stage also makes the oscillator circuit independent of the effects of the changes in the load of the power amplifier, thus improving the generated frequency stability. The control grid bias of the valve L-2 is obtained as a voltage drop across the resistor R14 due tc the grid currents. 123. The purpose of the other elements of this stage is identical with similar elements in the master oscillator. Power_analLier 124. The power amplifier (the output stage of the transmitter) uses the valve 4?PIL (L-1),which is shunt fed (Figure 24). The anode circuit of this amplifier L1 ? 03 is close coupled with the valve L-1. The semi? variable capacitor 5rimm4,7 %le serves for the fine adjustment of the circuit after a replacement of the power amplifier valve. Its shaft is brought up through the front panel of the transceiver unit (Figure 17). 125. The anode circuit is permanently coupled with the aerial through ? an auto?transformer. The output power of the transmitter can be checked with the aid of a crystal diode D-1, of type 10-2J-10, which is connected to the input of the aerial cable through capacitor C1 . 1.5 pF. Current, rectified by the crystal diode) flows through the resistor R1 and the switch W-2 to the measuring instrument located on the front panel of the transceiver unit. C2 is a blocking capacitor. 126. The control grid bias for the power amplifier valve is obtained from two sources. From the voltage divider R8 ? 119, through the resistor R and Choke L5' a permanent negative bias of about 8.5 V is applied to the 10 grid. This bias limits the anode current of the valve in absence of ? Arit SECRET / excitation.... 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ',SECRET ? ? 30 ? 50X1 -HUM excitation. When the excitation voltage is applied to the control grid, an automatic bias develops across the resistors Rio and R8 ' due to the grid current. As a result, the combined control grid bias during the uperation of the valve L-19 is about 19 V. The capacitors Cio and Cii are the blocking capacitors. 127. To the suppressor grid of the power amplifier valve is applied a small positive potential in respect of the cathode (about 9 V), through the resistor R5. The suppressor grid is ground?,d for the high frequency currents through the capacitor130 Frecuencv modulator 128. The frequency modulator uses the valve 12ZIL (L-4), connected as a diode rs.i.97 (the suppressor and the screen grids are conner:ted to the anode). The diagram of the frequency modulator is shown in Figure 25. 129. The anode current flows through the resistor RAE7? From this resistor an automatic bias is applied to the control grid of the valve (through the resistor R19L2Y and the choke L12 471). As a result, the ij control grid has a permanent negative bias of about 5 V in relation to the cathode. 130. Die to the negative potential of the grid, electrons emitted from the cathode form around it an electron cloud /pace char The capacitance between this cloud and the cathode, together with the electrostatic capacitance of the valve combine into a dynamic capacitance between the grid and the cathode of the valve. The magnitude of this capacitance depends upon the supply voltages of the valve. 131. When, in addition to the permanent negative voltage, a variable voltage is applied to the grid of the valve from the modulation amplifier through the capacitor 042 and the choke L12' then ? with the increase of the grid negative potential, the electron cloud will approach the cathode and the dynamic input capacity Cwd of the valve will be reduced (this capacitance 50X1 -HUN is indicated.... 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1 -HUM - , 41) bSECRET ? ? - 31 - is indicated on the diagram by a broken line). Conversely, when the nega- tive potential of the grid is reduced, the electron cloud will approach the grid, and the dynamic input capacity Cd of the valve will increase. The w control grld of the valve. is connected through the capacitor.036 to the grid circuit L11 C35 which determines the oscillation frequency of the master , oscillator (1,3). 132. When the grid-cathode capacitance varies with the modulating voltage, the combined capacitance of the master oscillator grid circuit also varies accordingly. As a result, the frequency of the master oscillator follows the variations of the modulating voltage or, in other words, the master oscillator is frequency modulated. "1. 133. Transmitter modulation is tested in the following ways from the anode of the valve L-4 through the capacitor 048 and the resistor R33 the variable modulating voltage is applied to two cuproxide rectifiers D-2 and D-3, In series with the rectifiers, through the switch W-2, can be connected an? indicating instrument, located on the front panel of the transceiver unit. The depth of the master oscillator frequency modulation is determined by the deflection of the instrument pointer. 134. The operation of the frequency modulator valve can be controlled with the aid of ?the same instrument. In order to check the operation of this valve, the instrument is connected to its anode through the resistor R21 (at an appropriate position of the switch W-3), and it then measures the voltage drop across the resistor R20 in the anode circuit of the valve. The. modulation amplifier of the transmitter 135. The modulation amplifier of the transmitter consists of a two- stage, wide-band (400 to 15000 kc/s), low frequency amplifier, which serves for the amplification of the signals from the multiplexing unit to the magnitude required for the proper operation of the transmitter frequency modulator. Both stages are designed as resistance-capacitance amplifiers using valves 12ZIE (Figure 26),connected as triodes. This amplifier is 11.11111FCRFT / characterised.,,,6 50X1 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SECRET - 32 - 50X1 -HUM characterised by very low non-linear distortions. 136. The overall non-linear distortion factor of the whole transmitter does not exceed 1,5% at the modulating frequency of 6600 cis and a frequency deviation up to 10 kc/s. 137. Grid bias for the modulation amplifier valves is obtained auto- matically as the result of the voltage drop across the resistors in the cathode circuit of each valve. Checking the operation of the amplifier valves is done similarly as in the preceding transmitter stages. 138. At the input of the amDlifier there is a potentiometer for the adjustment of the modulating voltage, and therefore for setting the required value of the frequency deviation. The shaft of this potentiometer is brought up through the front panel of the transceiver unit (vigure 17)0 The radio-rela receiver 139. The high frequency signals received by the aerial are applied to the superheterodyne receiver with double frequency conversion, and with an automatic frequency control circuit, (APCz). The block diagram of the receiver is shown in Figure 27, 140. The receiver is mounted in two solid frames, one of which 411/ contains the H.F. stages, and the other the I.F. and L.F. stages (Figures 19 and 20). 141. The frame containing the high frequency stages of the receiver is similar to the transmitter frame, and contains: high frequency amplifier - 1, mixer - 2, heterodyne oscillator - 3, automatic frequency control circuit - 4, and the quartz calibrator - 5 (see Figure 27), 142. The intermediate and the low frequency stages are composed of: first intermediate frequency amplifier - 6, frequency conversion circuit - 7, second intermediate frequency amplifier - 8, amplitude limiter stage - 9 discriminator amplifier - 10, low frequency amplifier - 11, d.c. amplifier - 12, 41111111ECRET / 143. 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 411111rSECRET 50X1-HUM 143. The receiver, like the transmitter, is tuned with the aid of a single knob. -Ugh frecigIla_aglaLgla 144. The tuned high frequency amplifier is composed of two identical stages (L-1, L-2), which are shunt fed and capacitively coupled. 145. The circuit diagram of the high frequency amplifier, including the input circuit, is shown in Figure 28. The amplifier circuit coils are made on ceramic forms, like the transmitter uircuit coils. 1111 146. The input circuit is coupled to the aerial through aa auto- transformer. 147. The control grid bias of each valve is obtained as the automatic grid bias due to the voltage drop across a bias resistor in the cathode circuit. 148. The high frequency amplifier ensures sufficient amplification of the signal applied to the mixer, and also attenuates the image-frequency signal of-the first I.F. ? kixer 149. The mixer (L-3) operates as a two grid frequency converter (Figure 29). The signal voltage from the high frequency amplifier second stage anode circuit is applied through the coupling capacitor C16 to the control grid of the mixer valve 1,3. At the same time, the voltage from the heterodyne ffocal7 oscillator (L-5) is applied to the suppressor grid of this valve. In this case the suppressor grid of the mixer valve works as a second control grid. 150. In the mixer there takes place the conversion of the high fre- quency oscillations (66 to 70 Mc/s) of the received signal, into the first intermediate frequency oscillations of 6.6 Mc/s. 11.0 SECRET / 151. 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 - 34 - 50X1 -HUM 151. A band-pass filter in the anode circuit of the mixer valve (L-3) is composed of two circuits: L60251 and L7C27 coupled together through the capacitor 026. Each circuit is separately screened. Screening shields servo also for the air-tight sealing of the circuits. The anode circuit coils have carbonyl powder cores. The first intermediate frequency voltage is brought from the circuit L7C27 through a coaxial cable type R4-19 to the control grid of the valve (L-7) of the first intermediate frequency amplifier. 152. The grid bias for the control and tho suppressor grids of the mixer valve is obtained automatically as a result of the voltage drop across the cathode resistors Rib and 1111. 119Iar_21m91122i7 oscillator 153. The heterodyne focag oscillator(I5) is designed and operates in the same way as the master oscillator of the transmitter (Figure 22). 154. The suppressor grid voltage for the mixer valve (L-3) is taken from the anode circuit of the heterodyne oscillator. 155. The heterodyne tlocai7 oscillator of the receiver operates in the frequency range of 59,4 to 63.375 Mc/s. First intermeelate fresnenci_p_m214:_ier 4110 156. The first intermediate frequency voltage from the anode circuit of the mixer valve L-3 is applied through the separating capacitor 062 to the control grid of the valve L-7 of the first intermediate frequency amplifier (Figure 30). As a load in the anode circuit of the valve L-7 serves the band-pass filter composed of two sections: L20064, and L21066. Circuits of this filter are built in the same way as the anode circuits of the mixer. The control grid bias is obtained automatically as a result of the voltage drop across the resistor Rin the cathode circuit of the valve L-7. / Second fr.22122.p.21.... 1111110 SECRET 50X1 -H UN/ 50X1 nRciassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? SECRET ? 35 50X1 -HUM Second_....112.212.1..9.1-miajl 57. The valve L-8 of the second frequency conversion circuit operates simultaneously as a second mixer and as a second, quartz stabilised, hetero- dyne 2r:focef oscillator. The cireuit diagram of the second frequency conver- sion stage is shown in Figure 31. The quartz crystal unit is connected be- tween the control grid and the screen grid which acts here as the heterodyne oscillator anode. The quartzcrystal frequency is 7.060 Mc/s. As a result of the action on the control grid of the valve L-8 of the first intermediate. frequeAcy oscillations, and of the quartz crystal natural vibrations of a frequency of 7.060 Mc/s, there appear in the valve anode difference frequency oscillations of 460 kc/s, which is the second intermediate frequency. The second intermediate frequency oscillations are selected and transmitted through the anode circuit filter composed of ten sections, and tuned to the frequency of 460 kc/s. The pass band and the necessary intervals between the operating wavelengths of the receiver are basically determined by the reso- nance curve 5haracteristi27: of this filter. The pass band of the receiver, when the signal amplitude drops to half its value, is 48 kc/s, and when it drops to 1/1000 of its value - 90 kc/s 5iif. The ten section filter is built as a single, small, hermetically sealed box. 158. The control grid bias for the valve L-8 of the second conversion circuit is automatically obtained as a result of the voltage drop of the grid current across tho resistor R42. Second intermediate freouenc amplifier 159. In the three stage second intermediate frequency amplifier the first and the third stages (L-9, L-11) are identical. The load of each stage consists of a single resonant circuit. The circuit diagram of the WPCz-2 (second intermediate frequency amplifier) is shown in Figure 32. The second stage of the amplifier L-10 is loaded with two screened circuits coupled by ? the capacitor 098. The circuit of this stage is similar to the circuit of the first intermediate, frequency amplifier (Figure 30). In order to extend the pass band frequency range, all the circuits of the second intermediate / frequency... orrogne"r 50X' 50X1 -HUN nRcliassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SECRET ? 36 ? a frequency amplifier are shunted With additional resistances. AEplitude limiter 160. The amplitude limiter stage circuit operates with grid detection and at reduced anode and screen voltages of the valve L-12 (about 50 V). The circuit diagram is shown in Figure 33. In proportion to the increase of the intermediate frequency voltage applied to the control grid of the -limiter valve through the capacitor C103, the negative grid bias increases. This bias develops across the resistor R62 due to the grid current.. As the anode and the screen grid voltages are relatively low, the valve anode current soon attains it saturation value, reducing therefore the average value of the slope of the anode current characteristic of the valve, hence also reducing the amplification of the stage. 161. . At a higher intermediate frequency voltage, the Legative bias of the control grid increases, and the limiter begins to operate near the cut- off value of the anode current. The d.c. component of the anode current is then reduced, and therefore the anode and the. screen grid voltages rise. As a result, the average valUe of the slope of the anode current character- istic, and the valve saturation current remain constant at all the inter- mediate frequency voltage values above the so called limiting threshold (Figure 34)4 Beyond the limiting threshold therefore, oven a considerable rise in the intermediate frequency voltage (the received signal voltage) does not increase the voltage in the anode circuit of the limiter. 162. Similar to the above amplitude limiter is the operation of the second 5.ntermediate frequency amplifier valves L-11, L-10 and L-9 (at a high signal level at the receiver input), and also of the first intermediate frequency amplifier valve L-7, resulting in a constant signal value at the input of the frequency detector. ETL9.112..may detector feriscriminator7 163. The discriminator (L-.13 and L-14) converts the frequency modu- lated second intermediate frequency oscillations into low frequency IIMP SECRET 50X1 -HUM oscillations. .... 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 11111 SECRET - 37 - 50*1-HUM oscillations. The circuit diagram of the discriminator is shown in Figure 33. The discriminator circuit uses two valves type 12ZIt connected as diodes (all the grids are short-circuited with the anode). 164. In the anode circuit of the amplitude limiter valve L-12 there is a resonant circuit composed of two coils L36 and L38 connected in series, and of the capacitors Clio and 0108. This circuit is tuned to the second intermediate frequency of 460 kc/s. The resistor R67 serves for widening the pass band of this circuit. With this circuit are inductively coupled two more circuitsg the circuit L37C112 tuned to the frequency of 490 kc/s, and the circuit L391 C.14 tuned to the frequency of 430 kc/s. When an un- modulated signal is applied to the discriminator, then the voltages of the second intermediate frequency developed across the circuits L C , and 37 112 . across the circuit L39 and C14 are equal. These voltages are applied to the diodes L-13 and L-14. Currents rectified by the diodes will develop but of opposite the earth in across the resistors R68 and R69 d.c. voltages of equal value sign. The resultant voltage in the load between point A and this case will be zero. 165. If, on the other hand, the second intermediate frequency oscilla- tions are frequency modulated then with the change of frequency in any direction, voltages across L370/12 and acrossL39 and C114 will not be equal. In the case of a frequency increase (460 + ft)1 voltage across the upper circuit L37C112 will be higher than the voltage across the lower circuit. As a result, current rectified by the upper diode L-139 and consequently the voltage across the resistor R68 will be higher than the current rectified by the lower diode and the voltage across the resistor R69. In this manner, with an increase of frequency, point A will acquire a negative potential in relation to earth. In the case of a frequency decrease (460 - ft) voltage rectified by the lower diode L-14 will predominate, and as a result 50X1-HUN / point A .... 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? SECRET 50X1 -HUM point A will acquire a positive potential in relation to earth. The magnitude of the potential difference between point A and the earth varies in proportion to the magnitude of frequency deviation ft. 166. The discriminator characteristic shown in Figure 35 shows the dependence of the resultant voltage values between the point A and the earth on the frequency deviations on both sides of the average frequency. 167. From the output of the discriminator (from point A), the low frequency voltage is applied to the low frequency amplifier through the capacitor C117. From the same point, voltage is applied to the receiver automatic frequency control circuit. IMLIP29.121122Y amplifier 168. The low frequency amplifier utilises valve L-15 (Figure 36) with transformer output. The low frequency voltage is applied from the dis- criminator load (point A, Figure 33) through the capacitor C117 to the voltage divider R72 - R73 and from the resistor R, of this divider to the i3 control grid of the valve L-15. From the secondary winding of the step-down transformer Tr1 (721) in the anode circuit of the valve, the low frequency signals are applied to the input of the multiplexing unit (Block 2). 169. The control grid bias for the valve L-15 is obtained automatically from the voltage drop across the resistor R75 in the cathode circuit. The 'valve L-15 operates as a triode (the screen and the suppressor grids being short-circuited to the anode), in order to reduce the non-linear distortiens. Automatic fre uenc, control circuit of the receiver 170. The automatic frequency control circuit (APCz) is used for the purpose of reducing the do-tuning of the receiver frequency in relation to the transmitter frequency. It also eliminates the need for manual fine tuning corrections. The voltage across the discriminator load R68 - R69 (Figure 339 point A), is applied to the control grid of the d.c. ampli- fier valve L-16 through a filter composed of the resistor R70 and the 50X1-H UN / capacitor 0118... nt?ict 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1 -HUM capacitor CI18 (Figure 37). The time constant of this filter is so chosen that the AFC circuit does not respond to brief de-tunings due to the carrier frequency modulation. The AFC circuit can, therefore, operate during reception of frequency modulated signals. 171. The magnitude and the sign of the controlling voltage depends upon the magnitude and direction of the intermediate frequency de-tuning in relation to the average resonant frequency of the discriminator circuits (mid-frequency of the receiver pass band). 4111 172. The d.c, amplifier uses the valve L-16. This amplifier serves ? for the increase of the AFC circuit regulation factor. The valve of the d.c. amplifier is connected as a triode. In order to prevent the AFC circuit reacting to the low frequency signals, in addition tc the large time constant filter R70 - 0118, connected to the amplifier input, the anode of the valve L-16 is shunted with the large capacity of C104. From the anode of the valve L-16 the amplified d.c. voltage is applied to the control grid of the frequency control valve L-6 through the potentiometer R571 the switch W-7, and the resistor R27 (Figure 38). In order to compensate the positive voltage applied to the control grid of the valve L-6 from the anode of the valve L-162 a compensating voltage of 45 V is applied to the potentiometer R57 from a special supply source. The accurate compensation of the positive voltage is carried out with the aid of the potentiometer R57 located on the left-hand side wall of the WPCz (I.F. amplifier) of the receiver (Figure 20). 173. The automatic frequency control stage is connected to the grid circuit of the heterodyne oscillator through the separating capacitor 049 (Figure 38). The principle of operation of this stage is the same as that of the transmitter frequency modulator, which was described above. The voltage applied from the discriminator to the grid of the frequency control stage varies the frequency of the first heterodyne oscillator in such a way that the initial de-tuning between the receiver and the transmitter is redImpa_ 50X1-HU / 174. 50X I npriaccified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ECRET ? 40 ? 50X1-HUM 174. The automatic frequency control circuit of the R-401 station operates during de-tuning in the range of ? 25 kc/s. The final de-tuning when this circuit is operating does not exceed 3.5 kc/s. gl-121Iq_9_ALIIPator 175. The quartz calibrator is used for the correction of the trans- mitter and the receiver frequencies after replacing the master oscillator and the modulator valves in the transmitter, after replacing the heterodyne oscillator and the frequency control stage valves in the receiver, and also during periodical testing of the frequency calibration and accuracy of setting of the transmitter and the receiver. A quartz calibrator is an integral element of any transmitting and receiving equipment. The valve (L-4) used in the circuit is of type 12= connected as trio(te (Figure 39). The quartz crystal is connected between the anode and the control grid of the valve. The natural frequency of the quartz crystal equals half the first intermediate frequency of the receiver fkw . 3.3 Mc/s. The anode circuit load consists of the resistor R19. The switching on and off of the vartz calibrator is done with the switch W-5 located on the front panel of the transceiver unit. When the quartz generator starts oscillating, across the resistor R19 there appears a voltage of the natural frequency of the quartz crystal fkw, and its harmonics nfkw 9 where n is the order of harmonic, an integer. This voltage from the resistor R19 is applied to the grid cir- cuit of the valve L-7 of the first interLiediate frequency amplifier, and also to the receiver input. After amplification in the high frequency amplifier and conversion in the mixer (L-3), the 20th harmonic of the quartz crystal (for the first operating frequency), or the 21st harmonic of the quartz crystal (for the 05th operating frequency) is combined with the receiver heterodyne oscillator fh, and produces the first intermediate frequency f, = nf giving a voltage across the anode load of the mixer (L-3). 1-posr. kw SECRET / 176. 50X1-HUN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? NIVSECRET - 41 - 50X1-HUM 176. The first intermediate frequency (f1-posr) and the second harmOnic of the quartz frequency (2 fkw) coming from the intermediate frequency amplifier, are combined after detection and produce a beat fre- quency at the output of the telephone channel. From the tone of the beats it is possible to estimate the degree of de-tuning of the first heterodyne oscillator of the receiver. When the receiver heterodyne oscillator is tuned accurately, a zero beat is obtained in the first telephone channel, The beats, the frequency of which does not exceed 500 c/s, are audible in the first telethons channel. If the beat frequency exceeds 4.5 kc/s, than it is audible in the second telephone channel. It is necessary to bear in mind that in this case, as the heterodyne oscillator de-tuning is being reduced, so the beat tone frequency in the second telephone channel will increase, because in this channel use is made of the lower side band fre- quency of the modulated carrier spectrum (see Chapter I). 4oMultiplexgjnit 177. In the multiplexing unit (Block 2) are assembled the telephone and the telegraph channel circuits. In addition, in this unit are located: 41) the "talk-call" device, (URW); the audio calling signal generator (GM); the calling signal converter (ZZ); and the d.c. vibrator converter of the line circuits. The voltages and currents in the various circuits, and the operating data for the multiplexing unit valves are given in Appendices' 4 and 5. Construction of Block 2 178. As a constructional base of the multiplexing unit use is made of an aluminum casting (chassis), to which the front panel is attached with bolts. In order to facilitate repairs, the front panel can be unscrewe 50X1-HUM removed from the chassis. For this purpose, the connections between the elements located on the chassis and the elements located on the front panel 50X1 / are made... lib SECRET Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 7 42 ? 50X1 -HUM are made of flexible and specially lengthened wiring. The elements of the telephone channels are located on the left hand side, and the elements of the telegraph channels on the right hand side of the chassis and of the front panel of the unit. The external view of the unit is shown in the Figures 40, 41, 42, 43, The most important elements of the multiplexing unit (filters, oscillator and discriminator circuits, transformers, etc.) are hermetically sealed. 179. The housing of the unit is made of dr,raluminium sheet. On the ? rear wall there are holes for the half-connectors of the connecting cellos. 180. The dimensions of the multiplexing unit including the housing are: 370 x 285 x 415 mm. Weight of the units 38 kg. ,The first tele hone channel 1.81. The first telephone channel is the natural speech frequency channel and occupies the frequency band of 400 to 2500 cis. 182. The block diagram of the first telephone channel is shown in Figure 44. The connections shown in this diagram represent operation as a terminal station, with a two-who input. The two-wire line coming from the telephone exchange is connec:ted through the line panel (not shown in Figure 44), through the mode of operation switch W-1, the talking key K-1, the transit attenuator T1 (0.5 N), to the hybrid junction unit (UR). The signal from the exchange, after passing through the hybrid Junction unit, through the amplitude limiter, through the attenuator (1.8 N), through the switch W-3, through the low frequency ?filter F-I with a band-pass up to 2500 c/s, is applied at the level of - 4.2 N to the input of the modulation amplifier of the transmitter. 183. From the output of the radio-relay receiver, the signal of the level of + 0.7 1\T after passing through the attenuator 0.5 N, the low frequency 410 filter F=I1 with a band-pass up to 2500 cis, and the attenuator T (1.8 N), 41IIP SECRET / is applied.... 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? rirSECDFT ? 43 ? 50X1 -HUM is applied to the input of the low frequency amplifier. Into the anode circuit of the valve L-1 of this amplifier is inserted the level indicator WP, for checking of the channel output level. From the output of the amplifier, the signal, after passing through the mode of operation switch W-1, the attenuator T5 (1.3 N), the hybrid junction unit UR, the attenuator Tl' the talking key K-19 and the mode of operation switCh W-19 enters at the level of - 2 N into the two-wire line. 184. Let us consider now the path of the calling signal with a two- wire channel inout. The magneto calling signal sent by the telephone exchange through the two-wire line, arrives through the switch W-1 to the receiver of the magneto calling signal OZI9 and activates the relays P1 and P2 (see Figure 49)0 This connects the audio calling signal gene- rator GZA to the transmitting part of the channel, and the audio calling signal of 800 c/s is applied to the input of the transmitter modulation amplifier. 185. From the output of the radio-relay receiver, the calling signal of 800 c/s is applied to the input of the low frequency amplifier, just as in the case of the telephone speech signal. In the anode circuit of the valve is the audio calling signal receiver OZA, which activates the relays P3 and P4 when the alternating voltage of 800 cis is applied to it As a result, the voltage of 4, 12 V is applied to the relay P3, which activates the calling signal converter ZZ and connects it to the two-wire line leading to the exchange. 186. With a four-wire channel input with re-transmission of the magneto calling signal, the channel mode of operation switch W-1 should be set in position 3. In this case, the two-wire input terminals serve for reception only, and an additional pair of terminals is used for transmission. 1100?SECRET. / 187. 50X1 50X1 -HUI\ 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? - 44 - 50X1 -HUM 187. Let us consider in turn the speech and the calling signal path with a four-wire telephone channel input. In this case the subscriber's calling signal arrives at the terminals "4-ro przew.nadaw."274-wire trans- missionf, and from there, through the switch W-1 (contact 3) and the talking key K-1, is applied to the hybrid junction unit UR, and then to the input of the transmitter modulation amplifier, as in the case of the two-wire channel input. The signal arriving from a distant operator is applied to the input of the low frequency amplifier from the receiver output, similarly as in the case described above. From the amplifier output, this signal, through the switch W-1 (contact 3), and the attenuators T3' T4 arrives at the terminals "4-re przew.odb." 274-wire receptiotlf, and from there, through the two-wire line is brought up to the subscriber, 188. The magneto calling signal arriving from the subscriber to the terminals "4-ro przew.nadaw." 274-wire transmissions is applied through the switch W-1 to the magneto calling signal receiver OZI. This will activate the relays P1 and P2, and the audio calling signal generator GM will be connected to the input of the transmitter modulation amplifier, as described above. 189. The 300 c/s calling signal from the subscriber, after passing the receiving part of the channel, is brought to the audio calling signal receiver OZA, activates the relays F4 and P5, and as a result, the calling signal is sent into the line from the calling signal conVerter through the termineAs "4-re przew.odb." 274-wire receptionS. 190. In the case of the 4-wire channel input without re-transmission of the magneto calling signal, the channel mode of operation switch W-1 is set in position 2. This kind of operation is intended for the case of secondary multiplexing of the telephone channel by the telegraph channels with the aid of type P-313 equipment. In this case, in the transmitting part of the 50X1-HUM / channel, 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 17111 SECRET ? 45 ? 50X1 ?HUM channel, the amplitude limiter stage is switched off Lalsconnectedf and in the receiving part of the channel, the audio calling signal receiver OZA is so switched off ffisconnectedg. On the transmitting side, the signal follows the following paths from the terminals "4-ro przew.nadaw.." 25-wire trammissiollf, through the switch W-1 (contact 2), the attenuators Tl and T2' to the hybrid junction unit UR, from its output, through the contact 2 of the switch W-1, through the attenuator 1.8 N, the switch W-3 and the low frequency filter F-I, to the transmitter input. 191. Froa the receiver output the signal is brought up to the low frequency amplifier, and from there, through the attenuator T3' and switch W-1 (contact 2), it is "4-ro przew.odb." 273-wire receptionf, 192. With a two-wire telephone channel connection of the R-401 station switch W-1 (contact 2), the applied to the terminals to the telephone channel of the type P-310 equipment, or to the R-400, the switch W-2 should be set in position "Tranz.", which disconnects the attenuator T1. In this case the speech and the calling signal pass in both directions in the same way as during the operation of the channel with a two-wire input. 193. The audio calling signal generator Ga, the calling signal converter ZZ, and the "talk-call" circuit URW, are common to both telephone channels, 194. The "talk-call" circuit makes possible the monitoring of the telephone channel communication, as well as the making of service calls between the radio-relay stations, and also between the stations and the telephone exchanges. 195. In order to provide the required stability of channel operation the re-transmission at the intermediate station is carried out by means of the 4-wire circuit. In this case the switch W-3 is set to the position ttrietr. Is 50X1 ?HUN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 _ Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 11111r SECRET C.6 - 50X1-HUM "Retr.", and the switch W-1 to the position 1 ("2 przew.TF"). At such a position of the switches, the signal from the output of the filter F-II in the receiving part of the channel is brought to the second half-set. During re-transmission, the signal arriving from the receiver of the second half-set is fed into the attenuator 4 N9 and then, after passing the low frequency filter F-IL is applied to the input of the first half-set trans- mitter modulation amplifier. In the receiving part of the channel, the low frequency amplifier is connected through the attenuator 1.8 N to the audio calling s:gnal receiver. In this way provision is made for the reception of the calling signal at the intermediate station. 196. If it is necessary to answer when the intermediate station receives a calling signal, then the switch W-3 should be set to the position of operation of the particular channel as a terminal station. With the aid of the "talking" key K-1, the "talk-call" circuit is connected towards the subscriber radio-relay station, and the conversation can be carried out. In order to send a calling signal from an intermediate station, the switch W-3 should also be set to the position of operation as a terminal station. Thrd junction unit 197. The hybrid junction unit serves for transition from a four-wire circuit into a two-wire line connecting the station with a telephone exchange. It enables the passage of the voice currents from the telephone exchange to the transmitter modulation amplifier only, and also the voice currents from the receiver - towards the telephone exchange only (Figure 45). 198. The hybrid junction unit is composed of a differential transformer Tr1(10)*, of a balancing network R10(52) 02(51)9 of the attenuator T1(6) in / the two,... * The figures in brackets indicate the numbering of the appropriate elements of the second telegraph channel. SECRET 50X1-HUN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 77411 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 47 ? 50X1 -HUM the two-wire side, of the transfer attenuator T2(7)9 and of the receiving side attenuator T5(10). In order to simplify the diagram, Figure 45 does not show the details of the connections between the attenuators T1(6) and 92(7) as this has already been described during the examination of the first telephone channel block diagram (Figure 44). 25.vo pages of original and Figures 46, 47, 48 misoinil 199. By means of the potentiometer R20(61), the shaft of which is brought up through the front panel, the output level of the telephone channel can be adjusted. The calling signal voltage is applied to the control grid of the valve L-1(2) from the potentiometer R20(61) through the transformer Tr5(14). In the amplifier is applied a negative feedback due to .the fact that the cathode resistors R16(58) and R15(57) are not shunted by the capacitors. The resistor R15(57) serves for checking 5ontrolligg7 the operation of the valve L-1(2). 200. In the anode circuit of the valve there are two transformers connected in series. Transformer Tr4(13) is the audio calling signal receiver input transformer, and the transformer Tr3( 12) is the amplifier output transformer. When the channel is operating in a two-wire system the winding 3 ? 4 of this transformer is connected to the hybrid junction unit; during operation in a four-wire system the windings 3 ?4 and 5 ? 6, connected in series, form the channel output. Winding 7 ? 8 serves for the connection to the "talk-call" circuit URW, which operates in a four-wire circuit. .110 SECRET 201. 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? SECRET ? 48 ? 50X1-HUM 201. Part of the alternating voltage from the windings 3 ? 4 and 5 ? 6 is applied through the resistor R11(53) to the cuproxide rectifier D-4(10), which can be connected to the measuring instrument for the adjustment of the telephone channel output level. The audio callin signal receiver 202. In parallel with the transformer Tr4(13) are two resonant circuits connected in seriesg one is a series resonant circuit L2(19)' C6(55), the other is a parallel resonant circuit L1(18), C5(54). They are both tuned to the frequency of 800 c/s These circuits 50X1 are connected to the cuproxide rectifiers D-5(11) and D-6(12), the load of which consists of the polarized relay winding P5(12). The above - circuit operates in the following way on the arrival of the 800 c/s calling signal, the current in the relay winding connected to the parallel resonant circuit is at its maximum, and the current in the relay winding connected to the series resonant circuit is at its minimum. As a result, the arm of the relay P5(12) moves towards the contact I) and shunts the relay P4(11). P4(11) The arm of the relay is released and closes the 12 V circuit comprising the pilot (signal) lamp IN2(4), and the additional relay P -3(10)e 203. The relay P3(10) disconnects the hybrid junction unit from the two-wire output, and connects it to the 600 ohms resistance. It also activates the calling signal converl-,er, and connects it to the line connect- ing the station with the telephone exchange. In this way, on the reception of the calling signal from the radio-relay station, the red pilot ffndicatos7 lamp LIT2(4) lights up, and a 20 to 30 c/s alternating current calling signal ic sent into the line. 204. For all the frequencies different from 800 cis, the current in the relay P5(12) 'winding connected to the series resonant circuit will be higher than at 800 c/s, and as a result the relay arm will be either at the .111110 SECRET idle contact.., 50X1-HUM 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? SECRET - 49 - idle contact or in a neutral position. To prevent the possibility of sending a calling signal by the voice frequency currents, the calling signal receiver acts with a delay. This is obtained by the means of the delayed release of the relays P4(11) and P5(12)au (which have short- circuited windings). 2t2_Tagneto calling sivnal receiver 205. The output of the magneto calling signal receiver is connected in parallel to the two-wire channel input terminals, or to the transmitter terminals with Cour-wire system operation (Figure 49). The magneto calling signal coming from the line, is applied through the choke D11(4) to the selenium rectifier bridge circuit D-1(7). The choke D11(4) presents a high impedance to the voice frequency currents, and so preirents the shunting of the speech circuit. For the 20 to 30 c/s frequency calling signal currents, this choke does not present practically any impedance. On reception of the magneto calling signal, the clArrent rectified by the rectifier circuit D-1(7) flows through the winding of the relay P1(8). This relay closes the contacts which supply the voltage of + 12 V to the pilot rindicatoil lamp liff1(3 ) and to the winding of the relay P2(9). As a result of the closing of appropriate contacts in the relay P2(9), the voltage + 12 V is applied to the windings of the bell Dzi. At the same time the audio calling signal generutor is connected to the transmitting part of the channel. 206. In this manner, when the magneto calling signal arrives from the exchange, the green pilot ffndicato2 lamp LN1(3) lights up, the bell Dz rings, and a calling signal is sent by the radio-relay station. The frequency of this calling signal is 800 c/s, as the radio-relay does not transmit the 20 to 30 c/s frequency signals. SECRET The audio frealrEac 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A03106001000V-R54 ? ? SECRET 50 frequency llin 207. The audio frequency calling signal generator GP, which serves also for measurement purposes, is common to both telephone channels. This generator operates continuously; and is connected to the bransmitting part of the telephone channel (Figure 49) when the calling signal is to be sent through this channel from the telephone exchange, and also when the calling signal or a measuring signal is sent from the radio-relay station. 208. The audio frequency calling signal generator (Figure 50) has a resonance circuit L23C68 between the control grid and the cathode of the valve L-3, and generates 800 c/s frequency oscillations. When a calling signal is sent, or during measurements in the first telephone channel, the voltage with f = 800 cis is taken from the winding 5 - 6, and in the second telephone channel - from the winding 7 - 8 of the transformer Tr15. The generator output level can be adjusted with the potentiomei;er R62 in the anode-screen circuit of the valve L-3. 209. The instrument indicating the measurement signal level in the first telephone channel is connected to the terminals DE, and in the second telephone channel - to the terminals ZZ. The calling_Ekpal converter 210. The calling signal converter is common to both telephone channels. When the calling signal is being transmitted, or the magneto calling signal is being re-translated, the calling signal converter is, switched with the aid of the relayP3(10 )fflinto the line of the particular channel. The converter consists of two relays, of the transformer Tr8, and of the filter and spark-quenching circuits. The calling signal converter is supplied with a d.c. voltage of 12 V. The 20 to 30 c/s alternating current is obtained from they secondary winding of the transformer Tr8. The converter gives a voltage of 70 V across a resistance of 2000 ohms. 41110PSECRET 1--'22-1:1LP-qaq-n-Ce-OX1- HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013%08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031006010004:5- ? ? MI SECRET ? 51 ? IOLLE22221292-filters 211. The circuit diagrams and the characteristics of the low frequency filters F-I and F-II of the first telephone channel are identical. Induction coils of these filters are wound on alsifer rings of type TC1C-53 Li indistincf, The filters have mica capacitors, and are hermetically sealed. The wave impedance of the filters is 600 ohms. As the first telephone channel occupies the frequency band from 400 to 2500 c/s, the low frequency filters for this channel are designed for the pass band up to 2500 c/s. 212. The filter attenuation for the frequencies of other channels of the station is not less than 6.8 N. The attenuation characteristic of the filter is shown in Figure 51 (curve 1). The second tele hone channel 213. The second telephone channel is an ultrasonic, or carrier, channel, The speech frequency band (400 to 2500 c/s) transmitted through this channel is first converted into an appropriate higher frequency band (4900 to 7000 c/s), which is then transmitted by the radio-relay channel. 214. The arrangement of the input circuits and connections of the second telephone channel, from the two-wire and the four-wire hybrid junction unit, is the same as in the first telephone channel (Figure 44). As far as the circuit diagram is concerned, the second telephone channel differs from the first channel only by the design of the transmitting and the receivjng portion, The block diagram of the second telephone channel from the input of the hybrid junction unit, is shown in Figure 52. 215. The telephone speech signals, which occupy the frequency band from 400 to 2500 c/s, from the output of the hybrid junction unit, and after passing through the amplitude limiter stage and the attenuator Tivf7 are applied to the ring,--type modulator, to which are also applied 7.4 kc/s eliSECRET / oscillations..., 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? IN. SECRET 50X1-HUM 52 oscillations from the local oscillator G. In the ring-type modulator, the amplitude of the oscillations of the generator G is modulated by the telephone speech signal. The lower side-band of the amplitude modulated oscillations 4.9 to 7 kc/s (see Figure 2) is separated with the aid of the band-pass filter F-III. The loWer side-band frequency oscillations separated by the band-pass filter are applied to the input of the modulation amplifier of the transmitter. 216. During reception, the oscillations of the 4.9 to 7 kc/s fre- quency band of the second telephone channel are brought up from the receiver output through the band-pass filter F-IV and the attenuator T14 to the ring-type demodulator "Dem". At the same time, to the demodulator are applied the 7.4 kc/s oscillations from the local generator G, In the demodulator "Dem" the 4.9 to 7 kc/s frequency band oscillations are converted into the 400 to 2500 c/s frequency band oscillations (corresponding to the transmitted telephone speech) which, after being separated with the aid of the filter F-V, are applied to the input of the low frequency amplifier. From the amplifier, the amplified signals are sent to the ,subscriber, like the signals in the first telephone channel. 217. For the calling signal transmission through the second telephone channel use is also made of the 800 c/s frequency signal which, however, is converted in the modulator into a signal of 6600 c/s. In the receiving side, the 6600 c/s frequency signal is re-converted back to the 800 c/s frequency signal, which then activates the audio frequency calling signal receiver, as in the first telephone channel. 218. The re-transmission of the second telephone channel/at the intermediate station is carried out without the re-conversion of the signal frequency band (without demodulation), i.e., at the frequency band of 4.9 to 7 kc/s. 41110SECRET / 219. 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? SECRET 50X1 -HUM ? 53 ? 219. The circuit diagram, the principle of operation, and the elec- trical parameters of the magneto calling signal receiver (Figure 49), of of the attenuators in the input the amplitude limiter stage circuits, of the hybrid junction unit (Figure 45), of the low frequency amplifier with the level indicator IP and the audio frequency receiver Oa 50X1 calling signal in the second telephone channel, are the same as 50X1 for the respective units and circuits in the first telephone channel. The modulator 220. For the conversion of the speech frequency band in he second telephone channel, a ring,-type modulator is used, composed of the trans- formers Tr16 and Tr179 and of the cuproxide rectifiers D-15 (Figure 53), The cuproxide rectifiers D-15 are connected ffyi series to form a ring, hence the name. Let us examine the principle of speech frequency band conversion in a ring-type modulator, 221. An audio frequency voltage is applied to the winding 1-2 of the input transformer TrI6 (Figure 55a), and a 7.4 kc/s frequency voltage from the generator G is applied to the central points of the windings 5 ? 6 of the transformers Tr16 and Tr17 (Figure 55b). 222. The resistance of the cuproxide rectifiers in one direction is very low, and in the opposite direction is very high, The 7.4 kc/s frequency voltage from the generator periodically alters the resistance of the modulator rectifiers in such a way that at the positive half-cycle of the voltage the current passes through the rectifiers in the longitudinal branches (Figure 54a), and at the negative half-cycle - the current passes through the rectifiers in the diagonal branches (bee Figure 54b). As a result, the audio frequency current flows through the primary winding of the transformer Tr17, and also through its secondary winding and the load resistor R obc. in one direction at the position half-cycle of the voltage of 50X1 -HUN / the generator.... 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 III SECRET ? ? ? 54 ? 50X1 -HUM the generator G, and in the opposite direction at the negative half-cycle of this voltage. In this respect, the operation of the ring-type modulator can be compared to the operation of a current reversing switch, the rate of reversal of which equals 7.4 kc/s. 223. 2:16 lines missing at the modulator output alternates with a frequency of 7.4 kc/s, and its amplitude varies according to the audio frequency voltage which is applied to the modulator input, This means that amplitude modulated oscillations are obtained at the output of the ring-type modulator. The lower side-band frequency signal (4.9 to 7 kc/s) is separated with the aid of the band-pass filter and is then applied to the input of the transmitter modulation amplifier (Figure 52). 224. ffirst line illegible, but perhaps as follows: "To ensure the symmetry of the modulator circuit, thus eliminating the undesired 7.4 kc/s voltage, a balancing variable resistor R7017 has been employed at its output in the circuit. 225. The attenuation introduced by the modulator at the conversion of the speech frequency band is about 0,8 N. The demodulator 226, The demodulator D-16 serves for the conversion of the 4.9 to 7 ko/s frequency band oscillations arriving from the receiver output, into the audio frequency band of 400 to 2500 c/s. The frequency conversion process which takes place in the demodulator is the reverse of the process taking place in the modulator. For this reason, the demodulator circuit diagram and the principle of operation do not differ from the circuit diagram and the principle of operation of the modulator (Figures 53, 54, 55). The only difference is that the demodulator does not require the balancing potentiometer. The 7.4 kc/s voltage is applied .... 251iim and a half lines missing introduced by the demodulator during the frequency conversion of the received signals is about 0.5 N. SECRET / The generator 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? SECRET ? 55 ? 50X1-HUM Thp_mperator 227. The 7.4 kc/s frequency generator operates as an electron coupled oscillator (Figure 56). Such a circuit gives high frequency stability, and also ensures that the load impedance does not greatly affect the frequency of the generated oscillations. The frequency of the generator oscillations depends on the parameters of the grid circuit L24.064. The resistor R76 serves for checking the operation of the valve L-4. In the valve anode circuit there is a resonant circuit Leo, which is inductively coupled with the modulator (winding 3 ? 5), and with the demodulator (winding 4 ? 7). The generator resonant circuits are hermetically sealed. The filters 228. The circuit diagrams and the characteristics of +he band-pass filters F-III and F-IV of the second telephone channel are identical. These filters are designed for passing the frequency band. within the limits of 4700 and 7000 c/s. For the frequencies of other channels they introduce an attenuation of not less than 5.8 N. 229. The characteristic of the second telephone channel band-pass filter is shown in Figure 51 (curve 2). 230. The second telephone channel low frequency filter F-V passes frequencies up to 2500 c/s. 231. ffine or two words obliterated - The filtersf are wound on alsifer rings TCzK-55 51, 53.7. The filters use mica capacitors. Filters of the second channel are hermetically sealed. The rated characteristic impedance value of the filters is 600 ohms. The "talk-call" unit 232. The "talk-call" unit (URW) serves for carrying out the service calls 5onversation.i7 through any telephone channel between the radio-relay stations, or between a radio-relay station and a telephone exchange station, UP SECRET and also.... 50X1-HUN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? III SECRET - 56 - 50X1 -HUM and also permits the checking of the quality of communication in both telephone channels. 233. The "talk-call" unit is composed of the following elements: the "talking" keys Kl and 1(4 (one in each channel), the checking key K2, the calling signal K3, the bell Dm1, the telephone hand-set MKT, and the auto-transformer Tr 9E/ 234. During operation as a terminal station with two-wire channel input, the "talk-call" unit is connected into the channels also as a two- wire unit. Thi "talk-call" unit URW operates as follows: when the key Ki (or 1(4 in the second telephone channel) is set to the position "Centrala" fExchange f or "Kan.rad." fRadio channelf, the two-wire circuit between the input of the particular channel and the hybrid junction unit is dis- connected (Figure 44)9 and at the same time the telephone hand-set of the URW is connected towards the telephone exchange or towards the radio-relay through the auto-transformer Tr9.arr. The microphone is energised through the contacts of the "talkinekey. In this case, when the calling signal arrives from the disconnected direction, the appropriate pilot ffndicatoi7 ? lamp lights up, and the bell rings. The calling signal does not pass any further. 235. In order to send the calling signal from the URW, the calling signal key 1(3 should be set in position 'Tow" fcalling signalf. Key Kl (or 1(4) in this case should be in a position corresponding to the direction where the calling signal is to be sent ("Centrala" or "Kanorad."). 236. With the aid of the checking key K2 the earphone of the telephone of the hand-set of the URW can be connected in parallel to either telephone channel, and thus to check the transmission of the telephone conversation without interfering with the communication in the other channel. / 237 ? 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 57 ? 50X1 -HUM 237. When the station operates as intermediate, in order to carry on a service conversation between the stations, the particular channel should be switched on to terminal operation with the aid of the switch W3(7), and the URW should be connected to this channel with the aid of the key 1(1(4). The mode of operation switch of the particular channel should be in the position "2 TF". 238, fome words obliterated7 checking key K2. 239. The "talk-call" unit enables one to maintain service communi- 111 cation with the telephone exchange when the station transmitter and receiver are disconnected. 1:122-.1222f201-2.12annels 240. The telegraph channels are ultrasonic. Their oreration is based upon the principle of telegraph pulse transmission with the aid of frequency modulated oscillations. The block diagrams of both channels are identical. The principle of telegraph pulse transmission with the aid of frequency modulated oscillations was described in Chapter I, The frequency bands occupied by the telegraph channels within the frequency spectrum transmitted ? by the radio-relay are shown in Figure 2. 241. The telegraph channel is composed of a transmitter receiver, and of a line unit. The transmitter serves for the conversion of d.c. pulses coming from the line into frequency modulated oscillations. It consists of a relay PN, an ultrasonic frequency generator G9 a matching attenuator T, and a band-pass filter FTG (Figure 57). 242. . The receiver serves for the conversion of the received frequency modulated oscillations into d.c. pulses. It consists of a receiving filter FTG, an amplifier (which is also an amplitude limiter), a frequency detector Lalscriminatv_7, cuproxide rectifiers, and a receiving relay PO 4111 (Figure 58). lb SECRET / 243, 50X1-H UN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? up SECRET ? 58 ? 50X1 -HUM 243. /Eome words obliteratef connects the line circuits with the ultrasonic circuits. The ultrasonic frequency generator 244. The ultrasonic frequency generator operates with inductive coupling Zfeed-bacg. The resonant circuit is in the grid circuit of the valve, and is composed of the coils L, L113(132)9 and of the capacitors 0117(147) and C118(148)1 The generator circuit diagram is shown in Figure 59. The generator valve L-6(8) is connected as a triode. The resistor R118(150) inserj,ed in the cathode circuit permits the valve operation to be tested. 245. The generator oscillation frequency depends on the position of 102(104)1 the arm of the transmitting relay P When the arm touches the left- hand contact L (Figure 59), then the resonant circuit consists of the inductance coils L, L,1130 /32) connected in series, and of the capacitors ?117(147) 0118(148) connected in parallel. In this case the first telegraph ' channel generator oscillates at a frequency of 8500 c/s, and the second tele- graph channel - at a frequency of 12200 c/s. 246. When the P102(104) transmitting relay arm touches the right- hand contact 1:), then part of the coil L113(132) is short-circuited to ground (its inductance is reduced), and the capacitor 01/8(148) is connected into the circuit through the very high resistance of the resistor R119(151)9 so that in practice it is disconnected. In this case about two lines obliteratef during the passage of the arm from one contact to the other, the generator resonant circuit consists of: the coils L + L113(132) and of the capacitor 0117(147). The capacitor 0118(148) is then disconnected from / the circuit... * The numbers in brackets refer to the appropriate components of the second telephone LL27 channel. SECRET 50X1 -HUN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? SECRET 59 - 50X1 -HUM the circuit the first telegraph channel generator generates oscillations of the frequency of 8300 c/s, and the second telegraph channel generator oscillates at a frequency of 12500 c/s. 247. The voltage developed across the second winding of the trans- former is applied to the band-pass filter FTg-2 (FTg-4) through the voltage divider (attenuator) R115(147)9 R1/4(146)9 which makes it possible to select the right level at the channel output. The tele_grlajalLs_i_gaa_Leseiver 248. The telegraph signal receiver is composed of an amplitude limiter stage, an amplifier, and frequency and amplitude detectors (Figure 60). The frequency modulated telegraph signals are separated by the filters FTg-1 (FTg-3) from the whole spectrum of the received signal fre- quencies (Figure 2), and they are then applied through the transformer Tr101(102) to the control grid of the amplifier valve L-5(7) (Figure 60). To this grid is also applied the composite grid bias, namely the voltage drop across the resistor R107(139) connected to the cathode circuit of the valve, and the voltage drop across the resistor R106(138), due to the grid current. The amplitude limitation for the purpose of elimination of the parasitic amplitude modulation of the signal, is obtained in this circuit by the grid current of the valve. The limitation starts at the transformer Tr 101(102) input voltage of 0.25 to 0.3 V. The resistor R108(140) serves for testing the valve operation. 249. Two resonant circuits, C1,-. lzk142) L109(128)9 1110(129) and 0113(143)9 L111(130)9 connected in series in the anode circuit of the valve, constitute the frequency detector 2Tiscriminatoil which, together with the cuproxide rectifiers, converts the frequency modulated oscillations into d.c. pulses. These current pulses flow through the windings of the receiving relayF101(103) so that the arm of this relay ' reproduces the d.c. 50X1 -HUN / telegraph SECRET 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 IIIPSECRET 50X1 -HUM - 60 - telegraph pulses within the line circuit of the telegraph instrument. The resonant circuits in the anode circuit of the valve L-5(7) are tuned in the first telegraph channel to the frequency of 8500 c/s and 9100 c/s, and in the second telegraph channel - to the frequencies of 12200 c/s and 12800 c/s. 250. The variable inductance coil L109(128) serves for tuning the circuit to the lower frequency of the 'belegraph signal. 251. The variable resistor R120(152) serves for the maintenance of the current balance in the windings of the receiving relay. 252. In Figure 61 is shown the frequency characteristic of the tele- graph channel receiver, which gives the graph of the dependence of the currents in the receiving relay windings on the degree of de-tuning f in relation to the average frequency of the channel (8.8 kc/s or 12.5 kc/s respectively). 11.10_12nA:p.ass filters of the teleraph channels 253. The receiving filter FT,g-1, and transmi'Aing filter Tg-2, of the first telegraph Channel are designed for the pass-band of 8400 to 9200 c/s. The receiving filter FTg,-3 and transmitting filter FT0--4 of the second telegraph channel are designed for the pass-band of 12100 to 12900 c/s. At the other channel frequencies, the first telegraph channel filters introduce an attenuation of not less than 3 N., and the second telegraph channel filters - of not less than 3.5 N. The attenuation characteristic of the, telegraph channel band-pass filters is shown in Figure 51 (curves land 4). The filter coils are wound on alsifer rings of type T00C-55. Mica capaci- tors are used in the filters. Filters are hermetically sealed. 254. The ted characteristic impedance value of the filters is 600 ohms. The line_12tion 255. The line portion of the telegraph channels permits the following modes of telegraph equipment operation: 50X1 -HUN uni-directional 3C?ACC I 9684 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 IS SECRET - 61 - ? 50X1 -HUM - uni-directional (single-polarity) pulse operation, with un-separated directions of transmission and reception 2:Le.9 single-channel operationf (operation of the sets ST-35 in a simplex system); - uni-directional (single-polarity) pulse operation, with separate directions of transmission and reception flouble- channel operation (operation of the sets ST-35 in a duplex system); two-directional (double-polarity) pulse operation, with separate directions of transmission and reception (operation of the Baudot instruments). 256. During uni-directional operation of the ST-35 sets in a simplex system, five windings are used in the transmitting relay (Figure 62a). Two windings (1-2 and 3-4) of 1250 turns each, and connected in parallel, form the line windings. The line windings circuit is closed through the receiving relay contacts. The next two windings (5-8) of 1250 turns each, are connected in series, and serve for the holding of the transmitting relay arm in position, should the receiving relay be activated accidentally. The ? fifth winding (12-13) of 5000 turns serves for shifting the arm from the right hand to the left hand contact, when a no-current pulse arrives from the line. In this case the line circuits are supplied from the side of the ST-35 set. 257. During duplex operation of the ST-35 sets, the receiving and the transmitting circuits are separated (Figure 62b), and therefore the winding 5-8 is not required. The line circuits in this case are also supplied from the side of the ST-35 sets. 258. During two-directional fl'ouble-polarit operation of the Baudot ? instruments with separated transmission and reception direction instruments (Figure 62o), only the windings 1-2 and 3-4 are used as in this case the ,111111VSIti--MT 50X1 -HUN / operation... 50X' L nRciassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? SECRET - 62 - operation is carried out with the aid of the two-directional ffouble- 50X1-HUM polarit currents. A voltage supplying the line circuits (- 60 V) is applied to the receiving relay contacts. The transmitting relay is supplied from the side of the Baudot instrument. 259. The switch-over of the telegraph channels from one mode of operation to the other is done by means of the rocking keys K102 and K104 which are located on the front panel of the multiplexing unit. 260. In all cases the "earth" is brought to the telegraph instrument either by a seIarate wires Or the same purpose can be served by the mid- point of the telephone service line between the station and the telegraph exchange. For the purpose of connecting the telegraph instruments with the radio-relay station use can also be made of the mid-points of the repeating coils connected to the telephone lines between the station and the signals 5ommunicationg centre. 261. Resistors R131 and R164 in the telegraph channel transmitting circuits serve for the adjustment of the rated current values (25 mA for Baudot, and 50 mA for the ST-35 sets). The shafts of these resistors are brought out through the front panel of the unit and are located in the apertures marked with a sign "Prad lin." flino currents. In order to carry out the receiving relay balance adjustment, when the radio-relay is used with the Baudot instruments, the shafts of the resistor R 577 and 130LE/ R164E' AT.. which are marked "Rownowazenie" fBalancing"7, are brought out through the front panel of the multiplexing unit. 262. The operation of the telegraph channels can be tested by measur- ing the currents of the transmitting valves L-6 and L-8, and of the receiving valves L-5 and L-7, and also the currents in the windings of receiving relays P101 and P103, and the transmitting relays P102 and P104 (the line currents during the transmission)* SECRET / 263. 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1 -HUM ? ? SECRET ? 63 ? 263. The design of the multiplexing unit permits the testing of the channel efficiency without using the telegraph instruments by means of the so called "Self-contained operation" raca na siebig. The telegraph Channels can operate when the station is used either as a terminal station, or av an intermediate 27epeatei7 station. There is also. provision for the extraction of any telegraph channel from the intermediate station. The linemnal 264. The line panel is used for .connectirg the telephone and telegraph lines coming from the communiceions centre, in the case when Oe equipment is removed for operation outside the truck (operation by remote control). The external view of the line table is shown in Figure 63. 265. During operation from the truck, the line panel is connected by a cable to the appropriate panel of input terminals located outside on the truck body, and to the multiplexing unit (Block 2). 266. On the line panel and on the input terminals panel there are two rows of similarly numbered terminals, serving for the connection of the lines brought up to the station, The purpose of each terminal is marked on the line panel. 267. The line panel is Provided with lightning protection of the lines. In each lead circuit there is a 0.25 A fuse and a mica lightning arrester. 268. Each line panel has two line transformers with centre taps. With the aid of a switch, any telegraph channel can be connected to the centre tap of any transformer, and when the two-wire line connecting the station to the communications centre 5xchang27 can be used simultaneously for telephone and telegraph operation. Mounted on the line panel is the bell of the appropriate half-set. 411111104ECRET 50X1 -HUM 5. Power Suulz_HELL.... 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1-HUM ? ? le SECRET - 64 - 5. Power lu_p_ply_..U.:4! Bleck dia am of the station power_p_ma 269. The block diagram of the station power supply is shown in Figure 64. The principal, primary source of the station electric power supply are the storage batteries. Each half-set of the station has three groups of batteries. Each group consists of two batteries type 5 NI-45 of a rated voltage of 12 V. 270. The batteries are connected to the appropriate half-set charging panels by means of flexible cables SZ-8. 271. From the charging panel, the voltage from the operating battery group is brought to the rectifier unit through the cable SZ,3, (Block 3) and to the lamps illuminating the interior of the truck through the cables K-3 and K-4. 272. From the rectifier unit, the voltage is applied through the con- nector S2-1-,?3 to Block 2 (connector SZ-1-2) and to Block 1 (connectors SZ-1-1A ). The batteries are charged from a petrol-driven generator set type PES-0.75, comprising an engine type 2 SD and a generator fclynam27 GSK-1500. The station is equipped with two such power supply sets, 4110 273. In order to charge the batteries, the generator set should be removed from the truck and connected to the input terminal panel by means of cable N-3 (half-connector "12-27 V"). The half-connectors "12-27 V" on the input terminal panels are connected by a cable S7-9 to the charging panels inside the truck. 274. The adjustable field voltage for the generator GSK-1500 is applied through the cables N-3 and SZ-9. The charging panels are connected with each other by means of the cable SZ-11. This makes it possible to charge any battery group of any half-set from one generator set by connecting it to any input terminal panel. Not more than three battery groups can be charged simultaneously (in any sequence). SECRET / 275. 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ft/SECRET ? 65 50X1 -HUM 275. When the station is supplied from the batteries, then the anode and screen circuits, as well as the grid bias circuits are supplied from vibrator converters. 276. Three vibrator converters form part of each half-set; - the transmitter vibrator converter; - the receiver and the multiplexing unit vibrator converter; - the telegraph circuit supply vibrator converter. 277. The station can also be supplied frcm 127/220 V a.c. mains. For this purposa each half-set is provided with a rectifier unit (Block 3). The a.c. is brought to the station through the cable N-4, connected to the. half-connector marked "127/220 V" on any input terminal panel. The station is equipped with three N-4 cables, two of them 25 m. long, and one 50 m. long. The half-connectors "127/220 V" mounted on the input terminal panel, are interconnected in parallel through the cable K-1, The voltage from the mains is brought to the mains attachment by the cable SZ-10 from the half- connector "127/220 VI' of the left-hand input terminal panel. The mains attachment serves for the connection and adjustment of the voltage from the mains, which is brought up to the rectifier unit through the cable SZ-4, and to the lamps lighting the interior of the truck through the cable K-5. 278. From the rectifier unit, the rectified voltage is fed through the connectors SZ-1-3 to the appropriate units of the equipment. The charing panel 279. Inside the metal housing of the charging panel (Figure 65) are located: - one single-pole on-and-off laminated 5akietow?switch of the petrol-driven mobile generator; - three double-pole, three-way? changeover, laminated battery switches; 50X1 -HUM one change-over voltmeter switch; 1110v SECRET / - generator.... Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? SECRET ? 66 ? 50X1 -HUM - generator field rheostat; - reverse current relay; - three rheostats and other elements for charging current adjustment. 280. ,All the switches and the rheostat knobs are located on the front panel of the charging panel. In addition, on the front panel are located three ammeters of 20 A range, a voltmeter of 30 V range, and four pilot findicatoil lamps. 281. On the lower part of the battery charging panel, behind hinged flaps, there are four fuees: one 50 A fuse in the charging assembly circuit, and three 15 A fuses, one in each of the storage battery group charging circuit. In parallel with the 50 A fuse there is a pilot lamp marked "AGR" obile generatog and in parallel with the 15 A fuses there are pilot lamps marked "I", "II", "III", which correspond to the numeration of the storage. battery groups, 282. On the lower board of the battery charging panel there are four half-connectors for cables SZ-8, SZ-3, SZ-9 and SZ-11, two terminals marked 12 V" and 12 V", and also the earth connector which serves at the same time as a common negative (- 12 V). In addition, on the right hand side wall of the panel there is a socket marked "12 V" for connecting the soldering iron, or the portable lighting lamp, On the left-hand side wall there is a socket for connection of the relay and telegraph channel adjust- ment instrument. 283. The battery charging panel is fixed to the wall of the truck body by means of a bar welded to its rear wall. 284. The battery charging panel makes it possible to: - connect the petrol-driven generator for battery charging; - switch on any battery group for charging, discharging, or to the position "WY?aczone"27Offf; SECRET - adjust,.,. 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET - 67 - 50X1-HUM - adjust the battery charging current; - measure the voltage of any of the battery groups. The vibrator converter 285. As was mentioned above, when the station operates on batteries, the anode and screen circuits, the grid bias circuits, and the telegraph line circuits are powered from vibrator converters. Each vibrator con- verter is fed with a voltage of 12 V from* the battery, and serves for the conversion of the low voltage d.c. into a much higher d.c. voltage. The voltage step-up is obtained by converting the d.c. voltage obtained from the battery into an a.c. voltage, stepping-up this voltage to the required value with the aid of a transformer, and then rectifying this higher voltage. For this purpose, use is made of a five-contact vibrator of type WS-12. This vibrator consists of an electro-magnet A and of three groups of static and vibrating contacts a, b, c (Figure 66). The vibrating contacts are fixed on a common arm. The whole vibrator is located in a screening box, covered inside with sponge rubber for damping, and for reducing the audible noises developed by the vibrator. Within the vibrator converter, 4111 the vibrator proper is an interchangeable element. ? 286. The principle of operation of the vibrator converter can be explained by means of the simplified circuit diagram given in Figure 66. At standstill the contacts 6 ? 8 are closed. When the voltage from the battery is switched on, current flows through the windings of the electro- magnet A, which attracts the arm. As the arm is attracted by the electro- magnet, contacts 6 - 8 open, and the current through the windings of the electro-magnet A stops. The arm is but, under the action of the spring, no longer attracted to the electro-magnet it returns to its initial position, 8. In this manner the arm begins 50X1-HUN thus closing once more the contacts 6 ? to vibrate. AD SECRET / 287. 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ?68 ? 50X1 -HUM 287. The arm vibration frequency (closing and opening the contacts) is about 100 c/s. When the arm vibrates, the contacts 7 and 1 are alternately connected to the negative terminal of the battery, and as a result the current direction in the primary winding of the transformer Tr alternates, producing an alternating magnetic field in the transformer core. An alternating e.m.f. is thus induced in the secondary winding of the transformer. 288. The alternating voltage induced in the secondary winding of the transformer is n turn rectified with the aid of the stationary contacts 3 and 5 and of the vibrating contact 4. Contact 4 located on the arm vibrates synchronously with the other group of contacts. A full-wave rectification of the alternating voltage takes place, and the rectified voltage is doubled with the aid of the capacitors Ci and C2, which are charged in turn through contacts 3 and 5. The polarity of the voltage across the capacitors remains constant. As the capacitors are connected in series in relation to the load, a double voltage is obtained across both capacitors and across the load. Each vibrator converter in the .station constitutes a separate element assembled on a rigid, cast frame. In order to ensure prol,er screening, the frame is divided into separate compartments closed at the top and at the bottom with metal covers. 289. For elimination of the radio frequency disturbances caused by the vibrator, the converter includes spark-quenching circuits and anti- interference filters. 290. The grid bias for the transmitter and receiver valves is also obtained with the aid of the vibrator converters. For this purpose the transformers of the transmitter and receiver vibrator converters have addi- tional windings which supply the required voltage to the selenium rectifiers. 50X1 -HUN / The mains attachment 40 SECRET 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 1111rECRET ? 69 ? 50X1-HUM The mains attachment 291. The mains attachment structurally consists of a rectangular housing with holes in the side walls (Figure 67). Inside the housing is an auto-transformer (130 W) and a step-down transformer Tri (Figure 68). 292. On the rear wall of the housing are located the half-connectors for the connection of cables (SZ-4 and SZ-10), the terminals Z3 and Z4 for tapping the 12 V voltage, the socket for the connection of the testing voltmeter SzT1 9 and the terminal "Ziemia"Zbarthge 293. On the left hand side wall there are two 12 V sockets for the connection of a soldering iron or a portable lamp. With the aid of the auto-transformer, the voltage 127 V can be maintained when the mains voltage fluctuates within the limits of - 20% to + 10% 5resumably "Variac" type auto-transforms:70 The mains voltage is measured with the aid of a volt- meter located on the table between the racks. The dimensions of the mains attachment are: 263 x 137 x 231 mm. The weight o2 the attachement is 11.5 kg, The rectifier unit 294. The rectifier unit (Block 3) is used when the station is powered from the mains. The rectifier circuits of the unit convert the 127 V a.c. voltage into he d.c. voltage required for the supply of the station. From Block 3 the rectified voltages are fed to Block 1 and Block 2. The construction and the elements of Block 3 are shown in Figures 691 70 and 71. 295. The rectifier circuits are divided into three groups. Each group has its own transformer. The first group, connected to the trans- former Tr1' supplies power to the transmitter and the telegraph line circuits. In the primary winding of the transformer there is a 2 A fuse and a pilot lamp in parallel with it. Both the fuse and the pilot lamp are located on the front panel (first from the left). This transformer can be switched on by means of the "mode of operation" switch "Prac.-Dyz." fOperation 111111111PSECRET 50X1-HUN / Stand by5.... 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 50X1-HUM - 70 - Stand bvg, which is located on the front panel of Block 1. Transformer Tr1 has four secondary windings, and the same number of rectifiers. The rectification takes place with the aid of full-wave bridge circuits built on selenium elements. 296. The output voltage of the rectifier D-1 is about 170 V. In the rectified voltage circuit there is a filter and a 0.15 A fuse with a pilot lamp. Both the fuse and the lamp are located on the front panel of the unit (second from the left),. 297. The output voltage of the rectifier r-2 is 25 V, which is applied as a negative bias to the control grid of the output stage valve of the transmitter. In the rectified voltage circuit there is a filter composed of resistors and capacitors. 298. The output voltage of the rectifiers D-4 and D-5 is ? 60 V. It is used for the supply of the telegraph line circuits. In the output cir- cuit of each rectifier there is a filter and a 0.25 A fuse with a pilot lamp located on the front panel of the unit (third and fourth from the left). 299. Resistors R3 and R4 at the output of the rectifiers D-4 and D-5 filters serve for levelling out 2Tqualisatio2 of the voltage drop after the load is switched off. .5ot quite clear, presumably bleeder resistor. 4111 300. The second group of rectifiers, connected to the transformer Tr2, supply power to the receiver and to the multiplexing unit. In the transformer primary winding there is a 2 A fuse and a pilot lamp located on the front panel of the unit (fifth from the left). The primary winding of transformer Tr2 is switched on by means of the "type of supply" switch, which is located in Block 1. The transformer Tr2 has three secondary windings. The rectifier D-6 connected to the winding 11-12-13 gives a voltage of 160 V for the supply of the receiver and multiplexing unit valves. In the recti- fied voltage circuit there is incorporated a filter and a 0.15 A fuse with the pilot lamp located on the front panel of the unit (seventh from the left). 50X1-HUN / 301. 50X1 L neclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 40 SECRET 50X1-HUM - 71 - 301. The rectifier D-7 connected to the winding 9 - 10 supplies a voltage of 45 V for the d.c. amplifier. This voltage can be adjusted by means of the variable resistor otentiometer7 the shaft of which is located in a cut-out on the front panel of the unit. In the rectified voltage circuit there is a filter composed of resistors and capacitors. 302. The centre tap (3) of the winding 1 - 5 is earthed. This winding supplies the 12 V a.c. voltage for the filament circuits of all the valves in the station. 303. The valve of the transmitter power amplifier draws its filament voltage of 4.8 V from a part (2 - 4) of this winding. The transmitter valve filament circuits can be switched on and off by means of the switch "Prac. - Dyz." fOperation - Stand byf located on the front panel of Block 1. 304. The third rectifier group is connected to the transformer Tr3. In the primary winding circuit of this transformer -there is a 2 A fuse with a pilot lamp located on the frontpanel of the unit (sixth from the left). The primary winding of the transformer Tr, is connected in parallel with the primary winding of the transformer Tr2' and can be switched on and off by means of the "type of supply" switch located on the front panel of Block 1. The transformer Tr3 has three secondary windings. The rectifier D-89 connected to the winding 3 - 4 - 5, supplies a voltage of 12 V to the calling signal converter, to the relay?, and to the bell. 305. The rectifier D-9, connected to the winding 6 - 7, supplies the voltage of 12 V for the telephone channel limiter stages, to the transmitter output valve suppressor grid, and to the microphone. At the output of the rectifier D-9 there is a filter. 306. The windings: V of the transformer Try IV of the transformer Tr2' and II of the transformer Tr have special taps for stepping up the 3 voltage..., 50X1-HUN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? SECRET - 72 - 50X1 -HUM voltage, which is necessary in the event of the aging of the selenium rectifiers. 307. The elements of the rectifier unit are assembled on a chassis to which the front panel is attached with bolts. The front view of the rectifier unit is shown in Figure 69. Over the fuses located on the front panel of the unit, are marked the values of the currents. The elements of the unit are located both under and over the chassis (Figures 70 and 71). 308. Dimensions of the rectifier unit: 354 x 150 x 402 mm.. 41111 Weight of the ulit: 15.4 kg. 309. The rectifier unit draws a current of about 1.6 A. This current is divided among the various groups as follows: rectifiers of the first group (Tri): - 0.44 A; - rectifiers of the second group (Tr2): - 0.70 A; - rectifiers of the third group (Tr): - -0.43 A. 310. The rated values of the voltages and currents supplied by the rectifiers of Block 3 are apecified in Appendix 6. The petrol-driven mobile generatorlsm12%-LacirE 311. For charging of the station batteries use is made of a petrol- driven mobile generator type PES-0.75, consisting of a one-cylinder, two- stroke engine type 2 SD, and a four-pole, shunt d.c. generator type GSK-1500 ,(Figure 72). 312. Technical specification of the 2 SD engine: powers - 2 HP - r.p.m.: - 3000 - cooling: - air - petrol tank capacity: - 3.75 litres - petrol consumption: - 0.9 kg/hour - weight of engine: - 20 kg. \-- fuel: - petrol A-66. el SECRET 50X1 -HUM / 313, 50X1 , Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 - Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 111!k?' cFrDFT ? ? 73 ? 313. Technical specification of the GSK 1500 generator: - rated power: - rated voltage: -1 rated current: rated r.p.m.: operation conditions: weight (not exceeding): - 12.6 kg. ? 1000 W - 24V -36A - 3000 - continuous rating 50X1-HUM 314. A detailed description of the design and operation of various ? elements of the engine is given in the special PES-0.75 instruction manual, "Instruction for the maintenance, operation and adjustment of the 2 SD engine". 315. Weight of the PES-0.75 assembly is 55 kg. 64 Aerial and Mast Equipment 316. Each station is equipped with two complete sets of the aerial- mast assembly. Each set is composed of two "Yagi" type aerials forming a cruciform structure, of aerial feeders, of a mast with a hoist, and of the mast rigging. The aerial assembly 317. The receiving and the transmitting aerials of each half-set are assembled on a common horizontal boom at right-angles to each other, and form one cruciform structure. The vertical aerial is tuned to the frequenby of 69 Mc/s, and covers the frequency range of 68 to 70 Mc/s (operating waves 28 to 54). The horizontal aerial is tuned to the frequency of 67 Mc/s, and covers the frequency range of 66 to 68 Mc/s (operating waves 1 to 27). The horizontal aerial dipoles are marked with white stripes. 318. The whole of the aerial assembly is collapsible., The dipoles ? are fixed on the aerial boom by means of special clamps. The active dipoles of the aerial are half-wave dipoles connected to the receiver or the trans- mitter by a feeder cable. SIECRET 319. 50X1-HUN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? MO SECRET - 74 - 50X1 -HUM 319. In order to eliminate distortions of the aerial radiation pattern the feeder is connected to the dipole through a balancing device 5a11.1g. The balancing devices of the vertical and of the horizontal aerials are located inside the aerial boom. The half-connectors for the connection of the aerial feeders to the aerials are located under the aerial boom, behind the reflector. The vertical aerial half-connector is painted white, and the half-connector of the horizontal aerial is painted with camouflage paint. 11111 320. Whe attaching the aerial to the aerial boom, it is necessary to pay attention to the numbers marked on the dipoles and their clamps. The aerial boom, together with the aerials, is attached by a special clamp to the wooden insulator which forms the end section of the mast. The external view of the deployed aerials of both half-sets is shown in Figure 11. 321. When the station is dismantled, all the elements of the aerial assembly are packed inside a duraluminium case (Figure 10), which is carried under the body of the truck. Each station has two cases with aerials. 322. Figures 73 and 74 show the horizontal radiation patterns of both aerials (vertical and horizontal) of the R-401 station, and the widths of the principal lobs of these patterns. The aerial feeders (cables) 323. For the connection of the aerials located-on the mast to the receiver and the transmitter of the station, use is made of a coaxial cable (feeder) of type RK-1, which has a characteristic impedance of 75 ohms. Each half-set has two feeders, 25 metres long. 324. At each end, the feeders are terminated with half-connectors. The half-connector of the vertical aerial is marked with white paint. 325. Before the erection of the mast, the feeders are fixed with a special clamp to the base of the wooden section of the mast. 4110 SECRET / 326. 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? - 75 - 50X1 -HUM 326. The feeders are carried inside the aerial packing cases. The mast and the mast hoist 327. Each station has two collapsible masts and two hoists. One mast is composed of nine sections. The top section is made of wood. It is 2 m, long and serves as an insulator. The other eight sections of the mast are made of duraluminium tubes, 1.6 metres long, one fitting into the other. 328. The mast hoist is 2 metres long, and is also made of duraluminium ? tube. It has a winch for lifting the mast, and a mechanism for holding the mast when lifted. The hoist has a metal base at the bottom, on which the whole mast rests. 329. In order to erect the mast, the mast sections are fastened one after another to the hoist and then lifted up. 330. The total height of the mast is 14.5 metres. The mast is held in a vertical position by means of twelve guy-ropes fixed at four different levels. At each level there are three guy-ropes a.c., an angle of 1200 to one another. The guy-rope fixing pegs are driven into the ground at a distance of 8 metres from the mast base. The pegs form the corners of an equilateral triangle (Figure 75). 331. The mast, when erected, can be turned around its axis. To hold the aerial in the desired position, there are two additional guy-ropes fixed to the ends of the aerial boom. 332. Sections of the mast are carried in a metal case attached under- neath the truck body. The hoists together with the top, wooden, sections of the mast are attached to the body of the truck on both sides of the driver's cabin. The winch and the locking mechanism of the hoists is protected with covers. ? -1110 SECRET / 21mina 50X1-HU 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? 76 ? 50X1 -HUM 333. The rigging of the mast is composed of three metal pegs, twelve guy-ropes and three half-rings. A mallet which is included in the station equipment, is used for driving the pegs into the ground. All the guy-ropes are made of a steel cable, the strands of which consist of 2 mm. diameter . wires. 334. At the top ends of the guy-ropes there are locking hooks or ordinary hooks for attaching the guy-ropes to the half-rings which are inserted into the grooves between the math; sections. At each level, two guy-ropes have locking hooks, and one has an ordinary hook. 335. In order to facilitate the erection of the mast, the lower ends of the guy-ropes are prolonged with hemp ropes, and have small wooden boards for adjusting the length of the guy-ropes. When the station is packed up, the rigging of the masts is contained in special packings (see Figure 10)9 *which are stored in the right-hand case inside the truck. 50X1 -HUP 50X1 npriaccifipc-i in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? 77 ? CHAFTER III OPERATION OF THE R-401 STATION 50X1 -HUM 1. a-otection of the Station against Damage 336. The proper handling of the equipment is a necessary condition for the maintenance of reliable and uninterrupted communication. 337. When using the station it ie necessary to: - pay attention to the mains or battery voltage; - protect the equipment and the interior of the truck against dust and dirt; when repairing the equipment or when removing it from the truckk to protect it against shocks and knocks.; - handle carefully the feeders and the connecting cables, and take care to maintain their efficiency; - protect the aerial mast section joints against dirt; - avoid throwing the aerial mast sections when setting up or dismantling the aerial; - protect the aerial doles against dirt and humidity, and prevent any bending of the dipoles; - handle very carefully the aerial feeders and cables during deployment and dismantling of the aerial. Avoid kinking them, especially during winter; - when in transit, make sure that the blocks in the racks are properly secured and protected with covers; - carry out the tests and technical examinations (Appendix 2). 338. The spare parts and accessories should always be in their proper places, and should be properly secured. 2. Choice of Site_1211_1th222212man:Uf_tts_at2I12n 339. When setting up the station in the field, the following factors 1111114ECR should b 50X1 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? -78- 50X1 -HUM should be considered: - location of the command posts; conditions of radio wave propagation, (ground); vehicular accessibility and equipment unloading facilities; concealment and camouflage of the station; - the necessity of protecting the station; - necessity of protecting the station against industrial inter- ference, against interference by other stations, and against deliberate jamming by the enemy. 3406 The radio-relay station should be sited in conformity with principles of anti-nuclear defence. 3449 The terminal radio-relay stations should as a rule be located as near as possible to the communications centres. This reduces the number of cables required for the construction of the connecting links, and also improves the quality and reliability of communication. The distance between the terminal stations and the communications centres depends upon the specific conditionsl the capacity of the equipment, and the type of cable used for the connecting links. The permissible attenu- ation for telephone lines is 1.25 Ne 342. The connecting wire lines, inTite of their short length as compared with the radio-relay links, form an important element which exerts a considerable influence upon the continuity and reliability of the whole radio link operation. It is recommended that the connecting lines should use ak, and that they should be kept under constant supervision. 343. In an afforested, moderately undulating terrain, or in a steppe, in order to ensure communications over short distances, if the masts are erected to their full height, no special care in the choice of route is necessary. 344. Practical experience has shown that it is possible to maintain infallible communication even if the line of sight of the aerials of 50X1 -HUM / corresponding 50X1 ariSECRET Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 4111100SECRET ? 79 ? corresponding stations is interrupted by a ground obstacle 50 to 75 metres high. An example of such a route is shown in Figure 76. It should, however, be borne in mind that a prior careful selection of a radio-relay route may considerable increase the stability (certainty) and range of communication. 345. Over open routes (free from obstructions? Figure 77) it is possible to maintain communication between two stations at considerable distances. It is possible therefore, in certain cases, to avoid using intermediate stations, or to reduce their number, if the ground conditions and tactical considerations permit the selection of open routes, 34-6. With a careful selection of the radio-relay route (with the 50X1-HUM smallest obstacle on the optical line-of-sight) it is possible to reduce the height of the aerials, which facilitates the camouflage of the station, and also makes more difficult the interception of messages and jamming of the station by the enemy. 347. For the above reasons, it is advisable to operate the station at reduced heights of the aerials even for long distance communication. 348. The erection of the aerial mast at less than full height requires much less time, and therefore reduces the time required for establishing communication. It is, however, necessary to bear in mind that in the presence of obstructions on the route, a reduction of the height of the aerial may affect the quality, or even cause an interruption of communication. 349. For this reason, in order to ensure a good quality of communi- cation when operating at reduced aerial height, it is necessary to Check the profile of the route and select either an unobstructed route, or a route with as few ground obstructions as possible. ? 350. Selection of an unobstructed route or a route with few obstruc- tions is of a great importance, especially at a long distance between the stations 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? -80- 50X1 -HUM stations, and when there are more than two intermediate re-transmitting stations. 351. In mountainous areas it may happen that communication will have to be established not only across open routes, but also across routes with considerable obstructions in the shape of .mountain ridges. In this case the station should be placed at least at such a distance from the obstruc- ting mountain that the top of the mountain is visible from the station. Figure 78 shows the profile of a mountain route on which continuous communi- cation was maintained even with an obstacle about 450 m high. 352. The selection of a radio-relay route is made on a map. The procedure when selecting a route is described beloW. 353. The site for the deployment of the station should be selected so as to ensure a proper clearance between the aerials Of the stations in correspondence. Steep slopes of plateaux, high embankments stone and reinforced concrete buildings, metal structures and transverse power and communication lines situated in front of the aerials, all have a screening effect upon metre-wave propagation. The station should therefore be placed as far as possible from the above features, It is advisable, on the other hand, to utilize them for hindering the enemy from interception and jamming& 354. The area required for the deployment of one aerial is 15 x 15 metres, and for two aerials 30 x 15 metres. 355. The distance between the aerials of adjoining half-sets of the station should be about 16 to 20 metres, and the distance between the mast and the truck should be about 10 metres, 356. The aerials of different half-sets should be located in such a manner that they do not interfere with one another when radiating. 357. The correct lay-out of the aerials is shown in Figure 79. 358. To avoid interference from industrial sources which may affect the quality of communication; the stations should be placed at least 300 11110SECRET / to 500 metres 050X1 -HUM , Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 411111rSECRET ? 81 ? 50X1 -HUM to 500 metres away from roads, industrial buildings, garages, electric rail- ways, high-voltage power lines, powerful short-wave stations, and radar sets. 359. When siting the station according to the principles of anti- _ nuclear defence, one should remember to arrange proper field engineering protection, and camouflage of the station site. 360. The truck must be placed inside a concealed trench. The trench should be 0.5 m deeper than the height of the truck. The fuel and lubri - cants should be placed in a special trench 20 to 25 metres distant from the trench with the truck. The area around the FOL dump should be cleared of all inflammable materials and objects. 361. In case of necessity, the station equipment can be removed from the truck and placed in a shelter. 3620 When operating by remote control, the units are fixed on a special cruciform structure. It is forbidden to place the equipment in front of the entrance to the shelter. 363. When arranging the shelter for remote control operation, it is necessary to provide for: - outlets for two aerial feeders, and for careful camouflaging and burying of the a depth of 20 to 40 cms in the ground; - electric power supply for the station (spare storage and their charging); - sites for the proper deployment of the aerials, seven two-wire lines; feeders and cables at batteries and their camouflage; - spare parts, and operational accessories (aerials, feeders, aerial sections, guy-ropes, radio valves, fuses, etc.). 364. The shelter should have a telephone connection with the tele- phone exchange. When the station is deployed at a considerable distance from the communications centre, service communication can be established with the aid of portable ultra-short-wave radio sets. 411. SECRET / 365. 50X1 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? eirSECRET -82- 365. During combat; when there is not enough time for building covers and shelters, in order to establish communication the station may be deployed without a specially prepared place of concealment* In such a case, however, one should ,utilize the camouflage characteristics of the ground. Gorges, ravines, ditches, subterranean structures, caves, etc. can be used for concealment, At the same time work should start on the preparation of concealment and shelters for the personnel and equipment, ? 3. Selection of the Radio-relay Route 366. The radio-relay route is selected with the aid of maps on a 50X1 -HUM scale of 1150,000 or 1100,000. The work carried out with the help of the maps consists of a study of the terrain between the points where the radio- relay communication is to be established, and of the division of the select- ed route into re-transmission sections, 367, The sites for the radio-relay stations are selected according to the requirements given in Chapter III, section 2* 368. It is recommended that the radio-relay route should be select- ed in the following way. The sites of the aerials, and the highest points of the terrain are marked on the map (Figure 80). 369. In Figure 80 the terminal stations are located at points A and D, and the intermediate [re-transmission] station is at point B. 370. The approximate assessment of the route consists of the compari- son of half of the sum of altitudes of points A and B (mean value including the heights of the masts), with the sum of the highest altitude on the route between the points A and B, and the height of the arc of the curvature of the earth, corresponding to the given distance between the points A and B. ? 371. If one half of the sum of the altitudes of the points A and B is greater than the sum of the altitudes of the highest point and the height of the arc of the curvature of the earth, then at the first approximation SECR / it can be mem 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? 83 ? 50X1-HUM it can be considered that the line-of-sight between the aerials located at points A and B is unobstructed. In the opposite case, the line-of-sight is Obstructed. The difference between the first and the second value indicates the degree of the obstruction of the optical line-of-Sight. 372. The rise of the arc of the curvature of the earth is approxim- ately expressed in the following formula: R2 H = 50 where: R - distance in kilometres, H - height of the curvature arc in metres. 373. As an example, let. us check whether there is an unobstructed, line-of-sight between the aerials of the stations located at points A and B. The distance between the stations, estimated from the map is Ri= 50 kms. Assuming that the masts of both stations are 14 metres high, the altitudes of the aerials above sea level will be: at point Ai 174.2 + 14 = 188.2 m. at point B: 16040 + 14 =174.0 m4 Half of the sum of altitudes of the aerials above sea level is: 188.2 + 174.0 =181.1 m. 2 The height of the earth curvature arc is: H 50 x 50 = 50 m. 50 The sum of the altitude of point C and the height of the earth curvature is 160 + 50 = 210 m. 374. By comparing the value of half of the sum of the aerial altitudes with the sum of the altitude of the highest Obstruction on the route and the height of the earth curvature, we find that the first value is less than the second. It can be stated therefore that there is no direct, unobstructed line-of-sight between the aerials, 375. From the above example it can be seen that the obstruction in SECRET he sector 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1 -HUM the sector AB (Figure 80) amounts to 210 - 181.1 = 28.9 m. Since, in the ease of the R-410 rnalo-relay the permissible height of the obstruction on the route is 50 to 75 metres, it can be assumed that it is possible to establish communication along this route. - 376. By similar calculation, it is easy to prove that in the sector BD there is a direct, unobstructed line-of-sight between the aerials (Figure 80). 377. For the accurate determination of the route profile, it is 4111 necessary to draw the arc of the earth curvature and then plot onto it all ? the principal heights along the route,. In order to trace such an arc, one first calculates its height with the help of the above formula. One then marks a series of points as shown in Figure 81, where A and B are the sites of the stations, and C, D El Fp G are the supplementary points. Through these points is traced a curve which corresponds to the arc of the earth curvature. 3780 On the arc are plotted on an appropriate scale the altitudes of various heights along the route, as read from the map. These points, connected by a continuous line give the profile of the route (Figure 82). 379? example: trace the arc Of the earth curvature for a 50 km long sector of the route. H = 50 m, 8H = 8.3 km. m. 0.36 R = ita = 25 m. 6 9 2 380. The earth curvature arc traced with the aid of the above values will appear as shown in Figure 83. 381. Instead of tracing the earth curvature arc every time it sis also possible to use special tracing forms which are prepared in advance. The routes traced with the aid of such forms are shown in Figure 76 and 77. SECRET 50X1-HU 4. Selection.... 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 -85- 50X1 -HUM 4, Selection of the Operating Frequencies 382. A very important problem when preparing the documents necessary for the organisation of radio-relay communication, is the selection of the operating and. reserve frequencies, 383* If the operational frequencies are selected incorrectly, then the transmitter of the neighbouring half-set of the station, or the trans- mitters of other stations nearby, may interfere with the operation of the receiver. 384, In the case when a powerful signal from an interfering trans- mitter enters the input of the receiver, its capacity for the reception of signals from the station in correspondence will be reduced, In addition, an audible beat frequency may appear at the receiver output resulting from the coincidence of the interfering signal with the signal frim the station in correspondence. 385. When selecting the operational waves,one should be guided by the principles laid down in this manual. It has also been found in practice that the harmonics of the short-wave and ultra-short-wave transmitters of other stations interfere seriously with the operation of the radio-relay stations located nearby. The simultaneous operation of such transmitters and of the radio-relay stations located in their vicinity can be carried out without interference only when the operational frequencies are so distributed that the harmonics of the short-wave and the ultra-short-wave transmitters do not coincide with the frequency of the signal received by the radio-relay station. The above remarks should be especially taken into consideration when the radio-relay stations are being used for remote Control. ? 386. 5. aplaTent and Dismantling of the Station. Deployment of the aerial and mast equipment The aerial and mast equipment is deployed by the station personnel composed of five persons. The deployment is carried out under 4111WSECRET 50X1 -HUM / the supervision 6.. 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? to SECRET ?86? 50X1 -HUM the supervision of the station commander* 387. The deployment of the aerial and mast equipment is performed in two stages: ? assembling the aerial and installing the hoist; - raising the mast; Lk few- words missing] " 601,em on the command of the station commander: "Begin to deploy the aerial". 388. At this command the members of the station team take the following actit - Number One selects and indicates the aerial site; - Numbers Two and Three take out the cases with the aerial and carry them to the aerial site; - Number Four takes out the cover with the aerial mast rigging from its cases and carries it to the aerial site; Number Five removes from the truck the hoist with the wooden section of the mast, and carries it to the aerial site; - Numbers Four and Five carry the mast sections to the aerial site; - Number One removes the aerial cables (feeders) from the case and unrolls them from the truck to the mast in such a way that they do not interfere with the deployment of the station, and then connects the cables to the aerial and the station equip- ments according to the assigned operational wave-lengths, Remark The aerial feeder with white markings, should be connected to the aerial having a half-connector painted white (vertical aerial). The unmarked feeder should be connected to the aerial with half-connector painted in camouflage colour (horizontal aerial). The covers of the aerial half-connector and of the aerial cable half-connectors should be tied together. When connecting the aerial cables (feeders) to the equipment it must be borne in mind that the aerials are tuned to different frequencies, The horizontal aerial is tuned to the frequencies of the first half of the frequency range (unmarked 50X1 -HUM 11111#SECR / cable) . . ..50X1 I I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? -87- 50X1-HUM cable), and the vertical aerial is tuned to the frequencies of the second half of the frequency range (cable marked white). ? Number Three removes the aerial boom with the mast end piece from the chest, and holds it in his hands while the mast is being assembled. - Number Two removes the dipoles from the chest and fixes them to the appropriate points on the aerial boom. Remarks 1) The upper, vertical dipoles, marked with a white stripe should be fixed in the upper vertical sockets of the aerial boom, which are painted white, and according to the numbering on the dipoles and on the sockets. The lower vertical dipoles are not fixed at this stage. ,2) The horizontal dipoles (without the white stripes) are fixed In the horizontal sockets of the aerial boom, according to the numbering on the dipoles and on the sockets. 3) In order to fix the dipole correctly in its socket, one should; insert the dipole into the socket as far as it will go; turn the dipole clockwise in the socket, again as far as it will go, and then pull the dipole towards oneself. - Man-110er Five holds the hoist in a vertical position, and removes cover from the hoist. - Number Four removes the guy-rope pegs from the packing, and drives, them into the ground 8 metres from the base of the mast at points indicated by Number One. He then removes from the packing the guy-ropes of the first level, attaches them to the top part of the hoist, and. then unrolls them towards the pegs. Remark The pegs should be driven into the ground at an angle of 45? leaning away from the mast. When the aerial is assembled (without the lower halves of the vertical dipoles) it is then fixed to the top of the wooden section of the hoist. 389. For this purpose; 1111 - Number Five inclines the hoist; - Numbers Two and Three attach the aerial to the wooden section the hoist; 41111P SECRET 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? III SECRET -88- 50X1-HUM of the hoist; Number Five lifts the hoist back to the vertical position; Number TWO fixes the lower dipoles of the aerial; Number Three takes out the ropes and attaches them to the aerial; - Number Four secures the guy-ropes to the pegs and tightens them, thus steadying the hoist; - Number One checks whether the hoist is vertical, and aims the aerial towards the correspondent station; Numbers Two, Three and Four unroll the guy-ropes of tit. 2nd, 3rd, and 4th level from the hoist towards the pegs. 390. On the command of Number One: "Begin to raise the mast", the following action is taken: - Number Two hoists up the wooden section of the mast with the aerial, then takes the duraluminium section of the mast, puts it into the socket in the wooden section, and turns it to make the pin enter the groove, places the holder of the hoist under the lower end of the mast section, and hoists upwards the mast with the aerial until the groove for the half-ring with guy-ropes is above the supporting mechanism of the hoist; ? NuMber One fastens the aerial cables (feeders) to the mast, inserts the half-ring into its groove, and fastens to it the guy-ropes of the fourth level, helps Number Two with the hoist- ing [of the mast?], ensures its vertical positioning by giving appropriate orders to the Numbers standing at the guy-ropes, and fastens the guy-ropes of the next levels to the mast; Number Two hoists the mast upwards. When attaching the next section, he lowers the holder of the hoist and puts it under the next section of the mast. He repeats these operations until the / mast 50X1-HUM 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 11110 SECRET -89- mast is lifted to the required height; - Numbers. Three, Four, and Five hold the guy-ropes, watching the mast and keeping it vertical, following Number One's inotructions. Remarks 1) The guy-ropes of the third level are installed between the 7th and 6th sections of the mast, and the guy-ropes of the 2nd level - between the 5th and 4th sections. When attaching the last section of the mast - the holder of the hoist is placed under it, but the mast is not lifted. 3) As a rule, the mast should be erected to the height of seven metal mast sections* The mast is erected to the height of eight metal sections only when there is an excessive noise level in the telephone channels. - Number Two releases slightly the braking mechanism of the hoist, and turning the crank slowly, lowers the mast on to its base; Then, together with Number Three, attaches the guy-ropes of the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th level guy-ropes to the pegs. He does the same with Number Four; - Number Three, together with Number Five, also attaches the 2nd 3rd, and 4th level guy-ropes to the pegs; - Number One gives instructions necessary for aligning the mast in the vertical position, and Numbers Three, Four and Five adjust accordingly the tension of the appropriate guy-ropes; - Numbers One and Four aim the aerial towards the correspondent station, and then fasten the aerial guy-ropes to their respect- ive pegs; - Numbers Two, Three and Four collect the remaining equipment and tools, and put them in their proper place; - Number Five earths the station. The second mast can be erect- ed in the same way, when required. 50X1-HUM / Dismantling of the aerial 50X1-HUN 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ID SECRET ? 90 ? Dismantling of the aerial and mast eqUEment 391_0 On the order of Number One: "Lower the aerial", the following Operations are carried out: - Numbers Three, Four and Five take up positions near the pegs, loosen the guy-ropes, and hold the mast in the vertical position; - Number Two lifts the mast slightly, so that the lowest section of the mast can be removed, takes off from this section the holdel- of the hoist, and removes the lowest section of the mast. He then crarks up the holder of the hoist, puts it on the next section of the mast, releases the braking mechanism of the hoist, and lowers the mast by turning the crank slowly* When the lower end of the section is about 10 to 15 cm. from the ground, he stops lowering the mast, and removes the next section of the mast; - Number One directs the lowering of the mast, and also helps Number Two; as the mast is being lowered, he unhooks the guy- ropes, removes the half-rings, and disconnects the aerial feeders from the mast. The whole mast is lowered in the same way.. 392, After the mast has been lowered: - Number Two holds the aerial hoist; Numbers Three, Four and Five detach the guy-ropes from the pegs, and straighten them; - Number Five detaches the guy-ropes from the hoist, and holds the hoist; - Number Four rolls up the guy-ropes and packs them; - Numbers Two and Three bring up the aerial cases, remove the lower vertical dipoles, and put them inside the cover marked with a white stripe; - Number Five 4110SECRE7 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A03100001000115 50X1 -HUM 50X1 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 393. !lb SECRET -91- 50X1-HUM - Number Five inclines the hoist and holds it in this position; ? NUbers Two and Three remove the aerial; Number Five puts on the cover over the hoist, and attaches it to the body of the truck; - Number Three holds the aerial while it is being dismantled; Number Two removes the dipoles, and places them in their respec- tive covers; Number One detaches the guy-ropes and disconnects the aerial feeders from the aerial and from the equipment, screws on the cups over the half-connectors of the aerial and feedees1 rolls the feeders up and places them in the aerial case; - Number Three, when the aerial is dismantled, places the aerial boom in the aerial case; - Number Two and Three place the case with the aerial into the case under the body of the truck, and lock it; Numbers Two and Three roll up the guy-ropt:s, pull out the pegs, and place them in their respective covers; Number Five places the mast sections in the chest, and disconn- ects the earth connection from the truck; - Number Four puts the parcel with the mast rigging into the right- hand case inside the truck. The second aerial mast equipment is dismantled in a similar way. 6. Switching on, Establishing Communication, and Switching off the Station Connection of a.c. mains 394. The a.c. mains are connected. to the station in the following way: ? 1) Before connecting the a.c. mains it is necessary to:- - check the mains voltage with the aid of the instrument TT-2. 41111111 SECRET le mains 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? arSECRET - 92 7 50X1 -HUM - set the mains on-off switch (on the left-hand side of the mains attachment) to the position "Wylaczone ["Off"]; set the "127/220 V" change-over switch (on the right-hand side of the mains attachment) to the position corresponding to the rated value of the mains voltage; - turn anti-clockwise the mains voltage adjustment knob as far as it will go; - check whether the truck is earthed. 2) Plug in the mains cable N-4 half-connector into any half-connector marked "127/220 V" on the left or right-hand side of the truck. 3) Connect the cable N-4 to the a.c. mains. Remarks 1) When connecting the mains, the safety regulation must be observed (see Appendix 1). 2) IT IS FORBIDDEN TO CONNECT THE STATION TO D.C. MAINS. anutption of ttp_mymE_Eu021,12LE the equipment, -when the station is connected to a.c. mains. 395. When the station is connected to a.c. mains, the switching on of the power supplY should be carried out in the following way: ? the mains switch on the mains attachment should be set to the positionlacz", ""On"J; - turning clockwise the voltage aajustment kndb on the mains attachment, adjust the voltage to 127 V, using the measuring instrument [voltmeter] located between the racks (the white lamp on the mains attachment, which shows the presence of the mains voltage, should light up); - the change-over switch "Praca- Dye' ["Operation Stand-by] which is on the front panel of block i (see Figure 17) should be set to the position "Dye, [Stand-by]; - the type of supply switch, which is located in the middle of / the front panel 4111110 SECRET 50X1 50X1 -HUM , Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 111111SECRET -93- the front panel of Block 1, should be switched from the position "Wylacz" ftOff"] to the position "Siec" ["Naine"]. (the radio receiver, and the telephone channels of the multiplexing unit are now -switched on). Switching onthe station battery power supply 396. Each half-set can-be supplied from any one of the three groups of batteries belonging to it. 397. The battery supply should be switched on in the following way: - the switch "Ladowanie Wylacz. - Rozladowanie" L"Charging - Off Discharging"] of the selected battery group, which is located on the charging panel of the respective half-set, should be switched from the position 'Wylacz." ["off"] to the position "Rozladowani ["Discharging"]; - the switch "Praca - Dyz." ["operation Stand-by"] which is located on the front panel of Block 1, Should be set to the position "Dyz.", ["Stand-by"]; ? the type of supply switch, which is located on the front panel of Block 1, should be switched from the position "Wylacz." ["offl to the position "Akumulatory" ["Batteries"]; the voltmeter change-over switch located on the charging panel of the half-set, should be set to the position corresponding to the selected group of batteries. 7:temarks 1) It is forbidden to discharge the batteries below 11 Batteries whose voltage has dropped to 11 V. should be switched on to the charging position. Another group of batteries should be used for supplying the station during this time. 2) The switching on of the transmitter power supply is described under the heading "Establishing communication". 3) The switching on of the telegraph channel power supply is described under the heading "Switching on of the _telegraph 111111PSECRET 50X1 -HUM / channels" 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 111 1111 SECRET ? 94- ? channels" (see Section 8 of this Chapter). [Page 109]. Setting of the 2at4 frequencies 398. The setting of the operating frequencies of the receiver and transmitter takes place when the station is connected for "Stand-by" operation. 399. IT IS FORBIDDEN TO ALTER THE TUNING OF THE TRANSMITMR DURING- ITS 0.FLRATI0N. 400. The operating frequencies of the receiver and transmitter are set in the following way: - the switch "Swiatlo Wylatz." ["Light Off"], on the Block 1 front panel should be set to the position "Swiatlo" ["Light"] (the dial lights of the receiver and the transmitter are then lit up); - unscrew to the left the receiver and transmitter dials locking screws; - rotate the knobs marked "Fala" ("Wave"' until the dial markings [divisions] corresponding to the selected wave-length numbers coincide with the vertical hairline pointers on the dial; lock the receiver and transmitter dials by turning the locking screws to the right; - set the switch "Swiatlo Wylacz." to the position "Wylacz." ["Off"]. Establishing_samE1:22-11210. 401. Communication is established when the station is operating as a terminal station. Communication should be established in the first plate with the station serving the immediate superior. 402. Before establishing communication, the switches on the trans- ceiver block and the multiplexing unit front panel should be set to the following positions: 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM - the "Kant. - 4s0$40 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? -95- 50X1-HUM - the "Konc. Retr." ["Terminal - Re-transmissiona] switch, to the position "Konc." ["Terminer] (operation as a terminal station); the telephone channel switch "Tranz. Konc." ["Transit - Terminal"] to the position "'conc." ["Terminain]; - the telegraph channels "ty'pe. of supply" switch, to position "Wylacz." ("Off"); - the quartz calibrator switch, to position "Wylacz. ("Off91; the AT;Cz [Automatic Frequency Control] switch, to position "Wylacz." ("Offth - the type of multiplexing switch, to position m:iewn. zwiel" ("Internal multiplexinel; type of telephone channel operation suitches, to the position "2M the telephone channel rocking keys, to the central position; ? the Block 2 instrument switch, to the position "TF"; the Block 1 testing instrument left-hand switch, to the position "Ant." ("Aerial") (testing of the transmitter output power). 4030 For the purpose of establishing comEunication, the follow- ing actions should be performed: - set the operational frequencies, and switch on the power supply of the equipment; - set the switch "Fraca Dyt." ("Operation - Stand-by"), on the front panel of Block. 1 to the position "Praca" ("Operation"). One should then hear the noise of the operating transmitter converter, When the transmitter valves have warmed up (15 to 20 secs.) the pointer of the testing instrument should lie within the marked sector of the instrument dial; the "talking" key of the first telephone channel should be set to the position "Kan. rad." ("Radio channel"] 0 In the 111111044ECRE7 50X1 absence of the ..,- 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? II lk SECRET - 96 - 50X1 -HUM absence of the carrier wave of the distant station Lcorrespondent station], strong receiver noise should be audible in the earphones; send the calling -signal to the distant station. For this purpose, the calling signal key should be tilt d to the position "Zee ["Calling signal"], and then returned to the central position; call the correspondent by sending his and own identification call signs. The presence of the carrier wave of the correspondent station can be recognised by the disappearance of the receiver noise, 404. When the correspondent station has anagered, the receiver auto- matic frequency control should be switched on, and the testing and adjust- ment of the telephone channel levels should begin; - in the case when a calling signal comes from the correspondent ? station, the red pilot lamp lights up on the multiplexing unit and the bell rings. Having received tha calling signal, it is necessary to answer the correspondent. For this purpose the "talking" key of the channel which received the calling signal should be set to the position "Kan. rad." {"Radio charmer]. Duling the conversation, one should depress the telephone hand- set pressel switch. 405. If correspondence is not established within 15 minutes after the pre-arranged time, one should start testing own station equipment (see sub-heading 7, item "Testing the station by self-contained operation"). 406. Having tested the equipment by "self-contained operation" method, one should again try to establish communication with the corres- pondent station. If, after renewed trial, communication is not establish- ed within 10 to 15 minutes, then it will be necessary to try to establish communication through indirect links - over the wire lines, or other available routes, while continuing the attempts to establish communication by means of the radio-relay (one should periodically call the correspondent SECRET / station 50X1 -HUM ....0 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 401 SECRET 50X1-HUM -97- station). When establishing communication, and during service calls only the service calls panel should be used. Ad'ustment of the tele hone channel levels 407. The adjustment of the telephone channel levels comprises the following actions: - the adjustment of the transmission level; - the adjustment of the reception level. ? Adjustment of the transmission level 408. On the multiplexing unit, one should: - set the change-over switch of the instrument to the position "GP 12. 1 / set the "on-off" switch of the instrument to the position "TF"; - set the calling signal key to the position "GP"; - by rotating the knob of the potentiometer of the measurement [testing] generator "GP", set the measuring instrument pointer to the Figure 50 (which is marked with a stroke); - set the first telephone channel "talking" key to the position "Kan. rad." ["Radio channeln] (the bell will then ring). 409. On the transceiver unit, one should: - set the left-hand switch of the measuring instrument to the position "Wej. nad." ["Transmitter input"]; - using the potentiometer "Ustawienie poziomu" ["Level adjustment"], adjust the frequency deviation by means of the measuring instru- ment, according to the [calibration ?] table supplied with each transmitter. Remarks 1) The transmitting level in the second telephone channel is also set after the adjustment of the transmitter frequency deviation, and after the adjustment of the receiving level in the first telephone channel in the second station. The only difference is that the measuring instrument switch is set to the position "GP2", and the measurement [testing] generator signal level, which has already been adjusted, is transmitted in the second channel. 50X1-HUM 11110SECRET /2) 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 1111 SECRET -98- 50X1 -HUM 2) One should not adjust the transmitter frequency deviation accord- ing to the transmitting level of the second telephone channel. Adjustment of the receiving level 410* The receiving level should be adjusted in the following way: - the Block 2 measuring instrument switch should be set to the position "Ui"; - the "talking" key of the first telephone channel should be set to the position "Kan. rad." ["Radio charmer]; - turning the knob of the first telephone channel potentiometer ? "I", Cle pointer of the measuring instrument should be set to the figure 50, which is marked with a stroke. (During the reception of the testing [measurement] signal .from the corresp- ondent stations the bell will ring); 41.10 The reception level in the second telephone channel is adjusted in the same way, with the difference that the measuring instrument switch should be in this case set to the position "U28$ while the level is adjust- ed with the aid of the potentiometer "II". Switchingoff the rt 412. When the station is supplied from the mains, the equipment 410 should be switched off in the following way: the type of power supply switches in Blocks 1 and 2 are set to the position "Wylacz." ["Off"]; - the mains attachment switch is set to position "Wylaoz." ["Off"]; - the voltage adjustment knob is turned anti-clockwise as far as it will go; the power supply cable is disconnected, first from the mains, and then from the input terminals panel; - the power supply cable is rolled up and placed in the left- hand case $ under the table with the equipment; - ,the earth connection is disconnected from the truck. / Remark ?04141. 50X1 -HUM -11110,SECR7 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? filiksmcm ?99? Remark 50X1-HUM When the equipment is being switched off temporarily, only the first action is performed. 413e When the station is supplied from the batteries, the equipment should be switched off in the following way: - the power supply switches in Blocks 1 and 2 are set to the position "Wylacz." L"Offnh the charging panel switches are set to the position ?rylacz." ["off"]; - if the batteries weie being charged, the petrol-driven generator unit is switched off; - the power supply cable is disconnected from the petrol generator unit and from the truck, and is then rolled up; - the generator unit is covered with its metal housing, carried into the truck, and placed under the table; - the earth connection is disconnected from the truck. Remark When the equipment is being switched off temporarily, only the first action is performed. 7. Checking the Readiness of the Equipment for Qperation Checking the supply voltaga:1? and the operating conditions of the valves. 414. For this purpose it is necessary: - to switch on the equipment; - check the presence of all the voltages. 415. For this purpose, the left-hand switch of the measuring instru- ment should be set in turn to positions: 160 nad." ["4. 160 transmittert "+ 120 1144, "'" 25 VII) IL' 45 "+ 160 odlaPP+ 160 receiver']. 416? When the voltages are normal, the measuring instrument pointer should deflect to the marked sector of the instrument scale; MCRET check 0:*(a0 50X1-HUM I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET -100- 50X1 -HUM - check the operating conditions of the receiver valves. /07, For this purpose, the left-hand switch of the measuring instru ment should be set to the position "Odb," PReceiver"3? and the right- hand switch should be set in turn to all the positions marked with numbers 1 to 16, which are located on the smaller circle (these numbers correspond to the numbers of the valves on the basic circuit diagram). 418. If the valves operate within the rated conditions, then in each position of the switch, the measuring instrument pointer should deflect to the marked secior of the instrument scale. In position 'V, the instru- ment pointer will deflect only if the quartz calibrator is switched on: - check the operating conditions of the transmitter valves. 419. For this purpose, the left-hand switch should be set to the position ?Tad." PTransmitter"), and the right-hand switch should be set in turn to all the positions from 1 to 6 (these numbers are located on the external circumference of the circle). 420. If the valves operate within the rated conditions, then the instrument pointer should deflect to the marked sector of the scale: check the supply voltages and the operating conditions of the valces in the telephcne portion of Block 2. 421. For this purpose, the measuring instrument switch "TF TatT should be set to the position HTF", and the second switch should be set successively to positions: "160", "12", "L-4", "Lt-3", 422. in each position of the switch, the measuring instrument pointer should deflect to the marked section of the scale: - check the supply voltages and the operating conditions of the valves in the telegraph portion of Block 2. 423. For this purpose, the switch "TF - Ta" should be set to the ? position "TG", and the second switch of the measuring instrument should be successively set to positions: "IP Pt,"11-511, "11-6" "T.P ?2 r P 11111r SECRET In each 50X1 -HUM . neclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET I 50X1 -HUM In each position of the switch, the measuring instrument pointer should deflect to the marked sector of the scale. In positions "LB", one measures the voltage of the line circuit vibrator converters. The particular telegraph channel should be at this time connected for operation with the Baudot apparatus, ? glallpg1112.1ranamitter power 4244 For this purpose it is necessary to: load the transmitter output with a dumpy aerial; set the left-hand measuring instrument switch to the position "Ant," ["Aerial"]; switch on the transmitter. At rated voltages of the power supply sources, the instrument pointer should deflect to the marked sector of the scale. Should the transmitter power prove to be too low, the resonant circuit at the output should be trimmed. To gain access to the trimming capacitor it is neCessary to loosen the screw marked "Obw. wyjsc." ["Output cilcuie] on the front panel of Block 1. The output circuit can be trimmed when the left7hand switch is in the position "Nad." ["Transmitter"], and the right-hand switch is in position "1" (numbers on the external circumference of the circle). The capacitor shaft should be turned until the minimum deflection of the instrument pointer is obtained (minimum anode current in the output valve). Having done this, the power delivered to the dummy aerial by the trans- mitter should be checked* Testing the transmitter modulation 4254 In order to test the transmitter modulation, the left-hand switch of the measuring instrument of Block 1 should be set to the position "Wejscie nad." ["Transmitter input"], and the "talking" key of one of the ' telephone channels should be set to the position "Kan. rad." ["Radio channel"]. 50X1 -HUM ifr The calling signal 11111&SECRET neclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? J. SECRET -102- 50X1 -HUM 426. The calling signal key should be set to the position "Zeve ["Calling signal"] or "GP". The measuring instrument pointer should then deflect. The measuring instrument pointer should also deflect when one blows into the microphone* Testing the receiver operation 427. For this purpose it is necessary to: set the "talking" key of the first or of the second telephone channel to the position "Kan. rad." ["Radio channel"]; check for the presence of noise in the earphones; - check whether this noise disappears when the quartz calibrator is switched on; - check whether beats (varying pitch of the tone) are audible in the first telephone channel, when the receiver is tuned to the frequencies corresponding to the points marked on the scale. Remark The full capacity of the receiver for operation is tested by the "self-containedeoperation method. Checkin the accurac of calibration of the receiver and correction of frequency. 428. Checking of the accuracy of calibration of the receiver and the correction of frequency is carried out at the rated voltages of the prim- ary current sources (12 V with the battery power supply, and 127 V with the mains power supply), after the warming up of the receiver (the warming up period should be not less than 1 hours with the transmitter switched on)0 and using for this purpose the first telephone channel. 429. The receiver calibration should be checked with the aerial feeder disconnected, and in the following way. 430. The receiver dial should be set exactly to the determined calibration frequency, which is marked with a point on the dial. 431* The transmitter is then tuned to a frequency which differs / not 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 41.SECRET 50X1 -HUM -103 - not less than 5 operating wavelengths from the receiver frequency. The receiver automatic frequency control unit is then switched on. In order to obtain abetter audibility, the first telephone channel type of oper- ation switch should be set to the position "4 TG". After having set the telephone channels control [testing] key into position "I", the receiver hum should be heard in the earphone of the telephone handset. 432. The quartz calibrator is then switched on. If the beat frequency can be heard in the earphone of the handset connected into the first telephoae channel, it means that the receiver detuning remains with- in the admissible limits. In such a case, there is no need for frequency correction. 435. If there is no beat frequency in the earphone of the handset, it means that either the receiver is accurately calibrated, and the fre- quency marked on the dial corresponds exactly to the frequency of the receiver tuning, or that, On the contrary, the ieceiver is considerably out of tune. It is possible to find out which is the case by turning the knob marked "Pala" ["Wave"]. If on slight rotation of the knob marked "Fala" to the right and to the left the beat frequency tone becomes audible$ and it begins on a law note, rising in pitch as the detuning increases, this means that the receiver is calibrated exactly. 434. In such a case there is no need for frequency oorrection. 435. If, on the other hand, there is no beat frequency audible in the earphone of the telephone andset, then the detuning should be increased by turning the knob to the right and to the left until the beat frequency becomes audible in the earphone. The presence of the beat frequency at another point of the scale, beyond the point marking the the calibration frequency, proves that the receiver is out of tune. such a case it is necessary to proceed with the frequency correction, 436. For the purpose of frequency correction, the following / operations 411111W SECRET 50X1 -HUM , Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? SECRET - 104 - operations should be performed: - remove the leaden seal, and screw out the bolt marked HO (receiver heterodyne oscillator); - find out on which side of the calibration point the beat frequency tone can be heard - whether on the side of the higher, or of the lower, wavelengths numbers; set the receiver dial exactly to the calibration frequency, which is marked with a dot; - turninF the shaft of the tuning capacitor, located on the right-hand side of Block 19 obtain a zero beat at the output of the first telephone channel. If the zero beat has-been prev- iously obtained on the side of the lower wavelength numbers, th,) capacitor shaft should be turned clockwise, and vice versa; - check the accuracy of calibration at another calibration point. The detuning of the receiver at this point should lie within the admissible limits. Remark For frequency correction,use should be made of the special. screw-driver, which is provided in the station equipment. When the local heterodyne oscillator valve Ir.-50 and the frequency tuning valve L-6 have been replaced, it is essential to check the receiver calibration, and to perform the frequency correction, Checking.the calibration accuracy of the transmitter and correction of the frequency. 437. The calibration accuracy of the transmitter is checked at the rated voltages of the power supply sources, one hour after the equipment has been switched on. 438. In order to check the calibration it is necessary to: remove the leaden seal, and screw out the bolt marked ZG (master oscillator); - put the receiver and the transmitter on load with dummy aerials; /- with the quartz 111111110SECRET 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? -105- 50X1-HUM with the quartz calibrator switched on, tune the receiver to the calibration frequency, which is marked with a dot, in order to obtain a zero beat; - set the transmitter dial exactly to the frequency corresponding to the frequency of the receiver* If the beat frequency tone can be heard at the output of the first telephone channel (or if there is a zero beat), it means that the detuning of the trans- mitter is within admissible limits, and that there is no need for the frequency correction a If,however? at the accurate setting of the transmitter scale to the frequency corresponding to the receiv- er frequency, there is no audible beat frequency, and the zero beat appears only when the transmitter is tuned to a frequency differ- ing from the correct frequency, this means that the transmitter is out of tune, and that a frequency correction is necessary. 439. The frequency correction of the transmitter should be perform- ed in the following way: - set the transmitter tuning dial exactly to the appropriate cali- bration frequency (according to the receiver frequency); - though the aperture in the side wall of Block 1, turn the shaft of the tuning capacitor, until a zero beat is obtained at the output of the first telephone channel; - check the accuracy of the transmitter calibration according to the receiver in the second calibration channel. 440. At this pint, the detuning should be within the admissible Units. Remark Before checking the transmitter calibration, the receiver should be set to zero beat at the point marking the calibration frequency, If the zero beat cannot be Obtained by tuning the receiver, the accuracy of the transmitter calibration should be tested at one of the adjacent calibration frequencies. One should first check the receiver calibration accuracy at the nearest calibration point. The receiver scale should be set very accurately to the given calibration frequency, as other- wise the calibration error of the transmitter will be increased 50X1 / by the error 50X1-HUM 11110101ECRET Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 424. by the error due to the inaccurate setting of the receiver frequency. - screw in the cap into the aperture ZG, and fix the leaden seal. TestinF the operation of automatic frequency control. The operation of the automatic frequency control should be tested at the rated values of the sources of supply voltages, and at the scale settings corresponding to the calibration frequencies. 442, The operation of the AFC should be rested in the following way: - tune the receiver to the calibration frequency; set the first telephone channel type of operation switch to the position "4TG"; set the telephone ohannel testing key to the position "I"; - switch on the quartz calibrator; set the left-hand switch of Block 1 to the positioa "Odb." ["Receiver"], and the right-hand switch to the position "Is-6" according to the markings on the interior circumference of the circle; - turning slowly the knob "Fala" ["Wave"] tune the receiver for zero beat in the earphone; - switch on the AFC (set the switch "AECz" to the position qllacz." POn"J). If after switching on the AFC the beat frequency pitch in the earphone of the handset changes) this shows that the'AFC is tuned correctly. 443. When the AFC is adjusted correctly, the current of valve 14-6 in the receiver should not change when the AFC is switched on and off. W. If the current does change, the AFC should be re-adjusted. Adjustment of the _AFC [Automatic frequenczcontrol] when the station is owered from batteries. 445. For this purpose, it is necessary to: - check the AFC operation; . - remove the leaden seal and screw out the cap marked "ArCzn, / - with the aid 4111101ECRET 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 111111PSECRET -107- 50X1-HUM with the aid of the potentiometer R37 located on the left- hand wall of the chassis of Block I (see Figure 20), adjust the circuit so that when switching the AFC on and off, the valve current does not change, and the beat frequency-tone pitch at the output of the first telephone channel also remains constant; screw in the cap into the aperture marked "APCzn? and re- fix the leaden seal. Adjustment of the Am [Automatic fre uenc control] when the station is Dowered from the mains. )1)4. When the station is powered from the a.c. mains, the adjustment of the AFC is performed in a similar manner as in the case of the battery power supply, with the difference, however, that the circuit is now adjusted with the aid of the potentiometer located on the front panel of Block 3. Remark In order not to disturb the adjustment of the AFC when passing from one kind of supply to the other, the circuit should be adjusted first with the battery power supply, and then with the power supply from the a.c. mains. Checking the operation of the station by the method of "self-containecroperation. 447. , The "self-contained'operation. consists of the co-operation of the transmitter of one half-set with the receiver of the other half-set, .or of the co-operation of the transmitter of a half-set with the receiver of the same half-set. 448. Both in the first and in the second case, the half-sets should be switched on for operation as in a terminal station. 449. As a rule, in self-contained operation, the transmitter of one half-set is used with the receiver of the other half-set. In this case the transmitter should be loaded with a dummy aerial, and the receiver is connected to the aerial with the aerial feeder. / In order to 50X1-H UM 11111PIECRET Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 108 ? 50X1 -HUM 4504 In order to perform the "self-contained" operation test, the transmitter should be tuned to the receiver frequency (it can also be done the other way round, by tuning the receiver to the operating transmitter frequency). If after the transmitter and the receiver are tuned to the same frequency, the noise in the telephone channels is considerably reduced then in turn one should test the channels for conversation and calling signal transmission. The testing methods have been described in the appropriate sections of this manual. The correct transmission Of tele- phone conversation, and of the calling signals proves the efficiency of the equipment. Such tests should be performed withdifferent aerials connect- ed to the receiver (the vertical and the horizontal aerial). The efficien- cy of the aeri41 and the aerial feeder is determined by the degree of the amp of the noise level in the telephone channels. 451. If the "self-contained" operation test is performed with the transmitter and receiver of the same half-set, the transmission of the tele- phone conversation should not be tested when using the "talk-call" circuit of Block 2. For this purpose of testing the efficiency of telephone conversation and calling signal transmission through the telephone channels, they should 'be switched into operation in the circuit "4TF", and the tele- phone instrument TAI-43 should be connected to the terminals 3, 4 or 7, 8 of the line terminals panel. Speech from the telephone instrument should be heard in the handset earphone of the "talk-call" circuit of Block 2 (the testing selector switch should be set to the position corresponding to the channel being tested). 452. When the calling signal is sent from the telephone instrument, the bell should ring. 453. All the defects found during the self-contained operation test should be removed forthwith. 4111burisaania / 8. Use of 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 1111P SECRET ? 109 ? 50X1-HUM 8. Use of the Equipment when Operating as a Terminal Station 454. The wire lines connected to the terminal station should be marked with the numbers of the central exchange sockets to which they are connectea? and with the appropriate code names. 455. As telegraph lines, one can use either separate wire lines, or two-wire telephone lines of the first and the second telephone channels, which in this case should be connected at both ends through the line trans- formers. The connection of the line transformers to the wire lines is made in the radiorelay station with the aid of switches located on the line panel. For instance, in order to use the lines of the first tele- phone channel for the operation of the first or the second telegraph channel, the switch "iTF" on the line panel should be set to the position ffiTGIt or "2TG" respectively. 456. If separate wire lines are used for the telegraph operation, the switches "iTF" and "2TF" on the line panel should be set to the posit- ion mArylacz." L"Off"1. 457. The process of establishing communication, and of the adjustment of levels in the telephone channels when the station operates as a termin- al station, has been already described in the sub-heading 6 of this chapter. We shall now examine the types of operation and the mainten- ance of service communication when the station operates as a terminal station. Operation of the station when asing own multi lexing equipment Use of the telephone channels 458. In order to prepare for use the telephone channels of the station the following steps should be taken: connect the wire lines of the first and the second telephone ? channels to the terminals "1 - 2" and "5 ? 6" respectively, on the input terminal panel (outside the truck); illbhSECRET - check 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 - 110 - 50X1-HUM check the transmission of speech and of the calling signals from the station to the exchange and vice-versa, For this purpose the "talking" key of the respective channel should be set to the position "Centro" ["Exchange"]; - check the quality of transmission of speech and of the calling signals through the radio-relay route from one terminal exchange station to the other, and vice-versa. The "talking" keys should in this case be set to the middle position. The transEission of the calling signals through the radio-relay is indicated by the pilot lamps. marked "Centro" ("Exchange) or "Kan. rad*" ["Radio channel"], and by the bell. When the calling signal comes from the exchange station, the green pilot lamp marked "Centr." lights up. When the calling signal comes from the side of the radio relay correspondent [distant] stationl the red pilot lamp marked "Kano rad." lights up; - the transmission of speech through the radio relay route can be tested with the aid of the telephone handset, by setting the testing key marked "Kontr." ["Test"] to the position I or II. Switching on the telegraph channels. 459. The telegraph channels should be connected in the following way: 0 - the telegraph channel type of power supply switch located on Block 2 should be set to the position corresponding to the particular type of power supply (mains or battery); set the switch "Konc. Retr." ['germinal Re-transm.") to the position "Konc." ["Terminal"]; - set the channel switch "Norm. Odwrotn." ["Normal Reverse"] to the position "Norm.", both for the "ST-.35" and for "Baudot" operation; -04.10 SECRET / - set 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 411W SECRET - 114 - 50X1-HUM - set the type of operation key "Bodo Dupleks - ST-35 - Simpleks" {"Baudot - Duplex - ST-35 - Simplex"] to the appropriate type of operation. 460. In order to test the telegraph channels by the "self-contained" operation method the following steps should be taken: - set the measuring instrument switch to the position "TG"; - set the type of operation switch to the position "Baudot"; - set the measuring instrument selector switch to the position 9.1" ("12.2 - - set the telegraph channel key to the position "Sprawd. 9.1" (12.8) ["Check 9.1"]. In this case, the + 60 V voltage is applied to the line winding of the transmitting relay, and the ultra-sonic frequency generator output is connected to the in- put of the telegraph signals receiver. The measuring instru- ment pointer should deflect to the right and should remain in the marked sector of the scale; the testing key should be set to the position Sprawdz. 8.5" (12.2). In this case to the line winding is applied the - 60 V voltage. The measuring instrument pointer should deflect to the left, and should remain in the marked sector of the scale; - check the deviation of the transmitter for each telegraph channel. For this purpose, the left-hand switch of the measuring instru- ment located on Block 1 should be set to the position "Wejsc. nad." ("Transm. input"] and the Switch "Faca Sprawdz," ["Operation -Testing"] located on Block 2 should be set to the position "Pram" ["Operation"]. The measuring instrument / pointer * Note Positions for the second telegraph channel are given in brackets. 41111WSECRET 50X1-HUM 50X1' Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 - Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 41. SECRET - 112 - pointer on Block 1 should deflect and should indicate the same number of scale divisions as is given in the table of deviations (it should be remembered that the deviation of the telephone channels has already been adjusted beforehand). Adjustment of the telegraph channels 461. The radio relay station telegraph channels are adjusted by means of the instrument included in the equipment of the station. 462. For this purpose, one should: ? at the terminal stations: connect the terminal "Nad." ["Trans- 50X1 -HUM mission"] of the instrument for adjusting the telegraph channels and relays, with the terminal "11" or "13"- of the line panel; the terminal "Ob." ["Reception"] - with terminals "12" or "14", as required;, the terminal "Z" - with the terminal "Ziemia" ["Earth"] of the line panel e The keys of the tel3graph channels should be set: one in the position "Dodo" ["Baudot"], and the other in the position "Praca" ["Operation"]; set the change-over switch "2 biegun. - 1 biegun" [presumably: 'Bi-directional Uni-directional"] on the instrument for adjust- ing the telegraph channels and relays, to the position "2 biegun."; - set the switch "Sprawn. Symetr. Bade kan." ["Efficiency - Symmetry - Channel test"] to the position "Bad.. kan." ["Channel test"]; set the switch Bad. kan. Sprawdzanie" ["Channel test - Checking"] to the position "Sprawdzanie ["checking"], and the switch "Normaln. Odwrotne" ["Normal - Reverse"] to the position "NormaIn." [Normal"]; switch on the instrument for adjusting the telegraph channels and relays; - turn the knob marked "Rownowazenie" ["Balancing"] until the . 40,SECRET 50X1 / pointer 50X1 -HUM I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 4. SECRET -113- 50X1 -HUM pointer oscillates about the zero mark. This shows that the positive and the negative pulses are equal; set the switch "Bad. kan. Spramdzanie" ["Channel test - Checking"] to the position "Bad. kan." ["Channel test"]. The properly adjusted telegraph pulses will then be sent to the transmitting part of the telegraph channel, and the telegraph pulses received from the other station will be applied through the receiving part of the channel to the measuring circuit and the instrument; set the instrument switch located on Block 2 to the position "LTi" ("LT2"). Then press the button "LT" on the instrument for adjusting the telegraph channels and relays, and with the aid of the potentiometer "Prad liniow." ("Line current"], located on Block 2, adjust the current until the pointer indicates the number 25; with the aid of the potentiometer of the telegraph channel being tested, located on Block 2 and marked "Rownowazenle" ["Balan- cing"], adjust the telegraph channel, until the pointer of the miliiammeter osal].ates about the zero mark. Remarks 1) The Baudot instruments operate with bi-directional pulses, and the ST-35 instruments operate with uni-directional pulses. As mentioned above, the channel adjustment is performed simultan- eously in both directions, both for the duplex operation of the ST-35 instrument, and for the operation of the Baudot instru- ments. The telegraph channel adjustment for the simplex operation of the ST-35 instruments is performed also in the Baudot circuit. 2) The basic data concerning the instrument for adjusting the telegraph channels and relays are given in the section 8 of this chapter. Preparation of channels for o eration with the telegraph instruments 463. For duplex operation with the Baudot or ST-35 instruments, AelIllObSECRElr / the wire lines 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? - 114 - the wire lines connecting the instruments with the telegraph channels 9hould be connected to the input terminals panel in the following way: the lines intended for transmission in the first and the second telegraph channels should be connected to the terminals, "11" and "13" respectively; the lines intended for reception in the first and the second telegraph channels should be connected to the terminals "12" and "14" respectively., For simplex operation of the instru- ments ST-35, the lines of the first and the second channels should be connected to the terminals "11" and "13" respectively. Remarks 1) For operation with the ST-35 instruments, the line circuits are fed with power from the side of the telegraph instruments. For operation with the Baudot instruments, the receiving line circuits are fed with power fromthe side of the radio-relay station, and the transmitting line circuits are fed from the line side. 2) When operating the ST-35 instruments, one can earth the negative or the positive terminal of the battery, on the Baudot instru- ment side. 3) If the positive terminal of the battery is earthed - the switch "NormaIn. Odwrotn." ["Normal - Reverse"] should be set to the position "Odwrotn." L"Reverse"). 464. The key "Spray/dz. L"Check - Operation") should be set to the position "Fraca" POperation"]. 50X1-HUM 465. Adjust the valves of the line currents. For this purpose, the multiplexing unit. measuring instrument switch should be set to the position "TG", and the step-by-step switch of the instrument to the position "LT1" or "LT2" (the line current of the appropriate channel). 466. At the radio-relay station, in all the cases, only the line input currents energising the telegraph transmitting relays are adjusted. The rated value of the line current can be obtained with the aid of potentiometers marked "Frad liniowy" ["Line current"). 467. For the operation of the ST-35 instruments, the line current should be adjusted in such away that the meter pointEr indices the division 41110SECRET 50X1 50X1-HUM / marked 0.... Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 11111FSECRET - 115 - 50X1 -HUM marked 50; this corresponds to a line current of 50 mk. During operat- ion of the Baudot instruments, the line current should be adjusted until the pointer indicates 25; ' this corresponds to a line current of 25 na. 468. Communicate with the telegraph exchange in order to check wheth- er the telegraph instrument operation through the radio-relay link is correct. 4690 ready for use. Operation of the station with external multiplexing 470. When the station operates with external multiplexing, the second telephone channel and both the telegraph channels are disconnected. On the other hand, the first telephone channel works normally, and can be used both for operational communication, as for service communication. 471. For operation with the external multiplexing equipment, the following steps should be taken: - establish communication, and adjust the telephone channel; - connect the transmitting path wire line On completion of the above steps, the telegraph channels will be levels in the first of the external multi- plexing unit to the terminals "15 -16" located on the input term- inals panel, and the receiving path wire line to the terminals "17 - 18"; set the left-hand switch of Block 1 measrring instrument to the position "Wejsc. flax'," ["Transm. input"]; - set the type of operation switch on Block 2 to the position "Zewn. zwielokrotn." L"External multiplexing"]; - adjust the transmitting level in the external multiplexing channel (the level adjustment is described later in this manual). 40 SECRET / Earthing 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? TIT SECRET 'V Earthing of the Station 50X1-HUM 472. In order.to ensure the correct operation of the telegraph channels, one should carefully earth the station. 473. To earth the station, proceed as follows: Eig two holes about 30 to 50 ems, deeps and at a distance of 15 to 20 in, from one another; drive earthing pegs into the holes, and connect these pegs by special leads. to the terminals "Ziemia" ["Earth"] on the input terminal panel, 474. The holes should be dug in low-lying sites, in damp ditches, in the vicinity of streams, etc.* When the ground has low conductivity (sand, stony surface, rocks?) one should bring an additional lead from the communication centre to serve as a return connection for the telegraph channels* Checking the state of the connecting lines and the quality of the ealltLag 475. The state of the connecting lines and the quality of the earth- ing is checked from the communication centre; the measurement should be applied to "the insulation" and "the earth" of the line being tested* 476. For the purpose of testing the insulation of any lead, it should be disconnected from the input terminal panel. 477. For the purpose of testing the insulation of a circuit through its mid-point, the switch "4TF" or "2TF" (according to the line being tested) must be set to the position "Wylacz." 1i!0ff"1. 478. In order to measure the "earth" of any circuit, the terminal of the appropriate lead on the lines panel should be connected With the term- inal "Ziemia" [flEarW]. 479. In order to measure "the earth" through the "mid-point of the 4110 circuit", the terminals "41." or "13" on the line panel should be connected to the terminals "Ziemia ["Earth"]s and the switch "ITF" (or "2TF"), 4111101ECRET should te set "50X1-HUM 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 11111111FSECRET -117- 50X1-HUM should be set as required to the position "lIG" or "2TG"* Adjustment of the level during external multiplexing. by means of triple carrier telephony equipment 480. Far this purpose, one should: - set the key "Sprawdzanie Fraca" ["Checking Operation"] to the position "Fraca" ["operation"]; - switch on the first telegraph channel power supply, and after the valves have warmed up (15 to 20 seconds) take a reading of the Block 1. measuring instrument; switch off the telegraph channel power supply; set the type of operation switch on Block 2 to the position "Zewn. zwielokrotr. konc." L"External multiplexing, terminalth - send. testing signals of a normal measuring level from the first channel of the triple carrier telephony equipment; by turning the shaft of the potentiometer marked "Zewn. zwielok- rotn." ["External multiplexing"] located on Block 2, set on the instrument of Block 1 the same value of readings as at point 2* 481, On completion of all the above steps the external multiplexing channel will be ready for operation* Adjustment of the level during external multiplexing by means of the sinEls_carrier telephony equipment 482* For this purpose, one should: send from the second telephone channel of the station a signal at the normal transmission level, and take the measuring instru- ment reading on Block 1; set the type of operation switch of Block 2 to position "Zewn. zwielokrotn. konc." ["External multiplexing, terminal"]; - send a calling signal from the carrier channel of the single carrier telephony equipment; - turn the shaft of the potentiometer marked "Rtr." PRe-transmissionft] located on Block 2, set the same level as that of the second 4111P1ECRET telephone 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? IlerSECRET - 118 - 50X1 -HUM telephone channel of the station (see above). 4830 On completion of all the above steps) the external multiplexing channel will be ready for operation. Secondary multiplexing of the telephone channels '484. By means of the multiple telegraphy equipment, multiplexing with three or six telegraph channels can be applied to each of the station telephone channels.* 485. The multiple telegraphy equipment should be connected to the four-wire circuit of the station telephone channel in the following way:, - in the case of multiplexing the first telephone channel) the transmitting direction line of the multiple telegraphy equipment should be connected at the input terminal panel to the terminals it3-4", and the receiving direction line to the terminals "1- 2". In the case of the multiplexing of the second telephone channel-- the transmitting direction line should be connected at the input terminal panel to the terminals "7 - 8", and the receiving' direction line - to the terminals m5 - 6"1, the type of operation switch of the telephone channel to which the multiplexing is applied, should be set to the position N.I.TG". 486. The remaining channels are connected for operation in the manner described under the heading "Operation of the station when using own multiplexing equipment. Transit [Re-transmission] operation of the telephone channels 487. The multiplexing unit of the radio relay station makes it possible to connect the telephone channels for transit operation [re-trans- mission] in a two-wire or in a four-wire, circuit. The transit operation is used when the station channels are connected directly with one another, or with the channels of a mai-channel station of the same type, or with the wire channels of a carrier telephony system. / 488. 4.111rSECRET ""6 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ar SECRET - 119 - 50X1-HUM 4880 The multi-channel stations and the sextuple carrier telephony systems permit transit connections with the telephone channels of the station in a two-wire circuit only. 489. The transit connection of the channels with a single carrier telephony system is possible both in a two-wire, and in a four-wire circuit. 490. In order to connect the telephone channels for transit oper- ation in a two-wire circuit, the following steps are necessary: - set the type of operation switch of the appropriate telephone channel to the position. "2TF"; - set the "Kono. - Retro" ["Terminal Re-transmission"] switch to the position "Kono." ["Teiminal"]; set the "Trans. - Kona." ["Transit Termina]."] switch to the position "Trans." ["Transit"1; - connect the wire connection lines assigned to the first telephone channel to the terminals "1 - 2", and those assigned to the second telephone channel to the terminals "5 ? 6" (on the input terminal panel). 491. In order to connect the telephone channels for transit operat- ion in a four-wire circuit the following steps are necessary: - set the type of operation switch to the position "4TF"; - set the "Retr. - Komi" ["Re-transmission Terminal"] switch to the position "Kono." ["Terminal"]; connect the first telephone channel wire lines of the trans- mitting direction to the terminals "3 ? /00 and of the receiving direction to the terminals "1 - 2". The wire lines of the second telephone channel should be connected to the terminals "7 - 8" and "5 ? 6", respectively. Service communication 492. Before using a telephone channel for service comrunication, 1.11PIECRET, 50X1-HUM / the testing key I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 0111111r SECRET - 120 - 50X1-HUM the testing key should be tilted into position I or II in order to check whether the particular channel is not being used for an operational con- versation. 493. For the purpose of carrying out a service conversation, the "talking" key of the unoccupied channel should be tilted to the position "Kan, rad," ["Radio charmer} or "Centro" ["Exchange"]. The calling signal should then be sent, 494. Calling of the distant radio relay station is done by sending 4111 a pre-determined number of calling signals. After sending the calling signals, the desired station should be called by sending its call-sign, and the call-sign of ones awn station. 495. In order to answer the calling signal from a terminal station, the "talking" key of the calling channel should be tilted to the position "Kan, rad." or "Centro" [Radio channel" 0 or Exchange] according to where the signal came from, 496. When the conversation is finished, the "talking"keys of the telephone channels should be set to the mid-positions. 497. Service conversations can be carried out onl in exce tional cases, after obtaining permission from the main [head] station, For service communication between the terminal station and the elements of the communication system there exists as a rule a separate line which is connected to the terminals "9 ? 10" on the input terminal panel. To the terminals "9 - 10" on the line panel is connected the telephone instru- ment TAI-43, which is included in the station equipment. 498. , It should be borne in mind that by making a service call along any section of the radio relay route, the communication between the tele- phone exchanges is interrupted. If the station receives a calling sign- al when a service conversation is in progress, then a green pilot lamp marked "Centr." ["Exchange] lights up on Block 2 and the bel2 rings. / 499. ow. %OP SECRET 50X1-HUM , Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 40 SECRET - 121 - 50X1-HUM 499. In such a case the channel should be quickly cleared, and turn- ed over to operational communication. At the same time efforts should be made to secure a good passage of the operational conversations. 500. During external multiplexing, the service calls can be carried out only through the first telephone channel, in the same way as described above. 501. During secondary multiplexing, the service calls are carried out only through the channel which is not multiplexed. 502. During two-wire circuit transit, service calls in both direct- ions are carried out in the same way as when the station is operating with own multiplexing equipment, 503. During four-wire circuit transit operation of the telephone channel, service communication with the radio-relay of the correspondent station is maintained in the following way: in order to answer a calling signal, the type of operation switch of the appropriate channel should be set to the position "2TF", and the rocking key "Kan. rad, - Centr." L"Radio channel - . Exchange"' to the position "Kan. rad." {"Radio channel"'. If only one channel is used for transit, then the service calls should be carried out in the other channel, in the way described above. 504. When the station is temporarily switched off, and the connect- inganes with the communications centre are not removed, then in order to - retain the possibility of receiving a calling signal from the exchange, the power supply should not be switched off on the terminal station charging panel. 9. Use of the Eaui ment Ehal21.12,2ming as an InteiIte Preliminary steps, and establishing of communication 505. In an intermediate station, both half-sets operate on re-trans- / mission ..... 50X1-HUM SECRET Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? 41111r SECRET - 122 - mission. To prepare the station for the re-transmitting operation one should:. - connect both half-sets, and establish communication with the correspondent stations in both directions. 'CommunicatiOn with the correspondent stations is established in the same way as when the station operates as a terminal station. The method of establishing the communication has been described under sub- heading 6 of this chapter; - adjust the station channels, The method of the channel adjust- ment has already been described; - notify the correspondent stations of the readiness of the station to go over to re-transmitting operation. Re-transmission when the station operates with awn multiplexing equipment 506. When at an intermediate station both half-sets operate as at a terminal station, then in order to go over to re-transmission, in the case of the operation with awn multiplexing equipment, the switches of the tele- phone %and telegraph channels should be set to the position "..Retr." ["Re- transmission"]. Remark During re-transmission0.the telegraph channel power supply is not switched on. The type of operation switches of the tele- phone channels should be set to the position "2TF". 507. Having done this the terminal stations establish mutual communi- cation through the intermediate stations, and, if necessary, adjust the levels. 508. The levels are adjusted in the following way: the terminal station sends a signal at the rated measurement [testing] level through the first telephone channel. This signal is received at the intelmediate station, for instance by the receiver of the half-set "A"1 and then through the cable "SZ-2" is applied to the transmitter input of the half-set / On Block 1 6.00, iliWSECRET 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM . Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 AV SECRET - 123 - 50X1 -HUM On Block 1 of the half-set "B", the left-hand switch of the measuring instrument should be set to the position "Ilbjsc.nad." ['Transmitter input"]. If the level of the received signal ensures the normal frequency deviation of the transmitter of half-set "B", then the measuring instrument pointer should deflect to the value given in the transmitter frequency deviation adjustment table. If the level is too low, then with the aid of the potentiometer of half-set "B" of Block 1, marked "Regulacja poziomu" ["Level adjustment"] the instrument pointer deflection should be adjusted 4110 to the value given in the table. This will correspond to the normal deviation of the transmitter frequency. 509. Having completed the level adjustment at the first inter- mediate station, the levels of the next intermediate stations should be adjusted in the same way. The level of the terminal station should be adjusted in the way described In sub-heading 6 of this chapter. The levels in the opposite direction are adjusted in a similar way. Re-transmission when the station o eratea with external multipl,.3xing 510. When the terminal stations operate with external multiplexing 411/ equipment, then in order to obtain the re-transmission at the intermediate station, the following steps should be taken:, - the type of operation switches of own multiplexing equipment of both half-sets should be set to the position "Zewn. zwielok- rotn. retr." ["External multiplexing, re-transmission"]; - the first telephone channel switches should be set to the position "Retr." [tPe-transmission"]; - the first telephone channel type of operation switches should be set to the position "2TF"; Remark The second telephone channels and the telegraph channels of the / station 50X1 -HUM ii: SECRET Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? SECRET - 124. - 50X1 -HUM station multiplexing equipment do not operate. Testing and service communications 511. During operation with own multiplexing equipment of the station, the passing of the calling .signals along the radio relay channels is indicated at the intemediate station by the ringing of a bell, and by the signal [pilot] lamps marked "Kane rad." ("Radio channel") of the particular channel on the half-set from the side of which the calling signal arrived. 512. On receipt of the pre-arranged call-sign, indicating the call- ing (of awn station by the correspondent), one should switch oneself in for listening by means of the telephone channel testing key of the channel which received the calling signal. After hearing one's own call-sign, the "talking". key of the channel concerned should be switched to the position "Kan. rad." ("Radio channel"), and the switch "Konc."- Retre." ("Terminal - Re-transmission") to the position "Konc." ("Terminarle The calling station should then be answered. 513. When the conversation is finished, the switch -"Ebnce - Retro" L"Terminal Re-transmission"1 should be set to the position "Retre"? and the "talking" key to the mid-position. 512+. The telephone exchange or any radio relay station can be call- ed from the intermediate station in exactly the same manner. Before ? using a channel for the service call, it is necessary to check which of the channels leading in the desired direction is free, by switching in for listering by means of the testing key. If one of the channels is free, the "talking" key of this channel should be set to the position "Kan. rade" ("Radio channel"), and the "Konc. Retr." switch - into position "Konc." ("TerMinal"). Next, tilting into the appropriate position the key "(IP - ZEW", one sends the calling signal- calling the desired station or exchange. After the conversation is completed, the key "Kan. rad. - Centre" ("Radio / channel Exchange.... OP' SECRET 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 4111111rSECRET -125- 50X1 -HUM channel - Exchange"] should be set to the midrposition? and the switch "Konc. Retr." ["Terminal Re-transmission"1 to the position "Retr." ["Re-transmission"], 515. Should a calling signal from another direction arrive during a service conversation, then the bell will ring, and on the other half-set the pilot lamp marked "Kan, rad." ['Radio channe1"1 will light up. In such a case the service conversation should be stopped at once, and the channel should be cleared. 516. Thc transmission of conversations can be tested at the inter- mediate station by switching the testing key "I - II" to the appropriate position. From one half-set, one can check the transmission of the con- versation in one direction only. Testing of the transmission in the other direction can be done in a similar way from the other half-set. 517. In the case of re-transmission with external multiplexing, the service calls can be carried out from the intermediate station through the first telephone channel. The testing of the operation, and the making of service calls, is done in this case in the same way as during re-trans- mission with min multiplexing. Extraction of channels from an intermediate station (Operation AS a main repeater station) 518* It is possible to extract telephone and telegraph channel from an intermediate station in two-wire and four-wire circuits. The extract- ion of the channels from an intermediate station is only possible when the own multiplexing equipment is being used. In order to extract a channel from an intermediate station the switches "Konc. - Retr." ["Terminal - Re-transmission"] of the appropriate channel in both half-sets should be set to the position "Keno." [tTerminal"]. 4111 519. The principles of maintenance of communication through the extracted channels are the same as in the case of the terminal station. 50X1 -HUM 10. Operation using 1111106 SECRET I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 1111111VECRET ?126- 106 Qperation ushe Portable Equipment 50X1 -HUM 520. The portable equipment serves for operation away from the truck. In many cases it may necessary to place the station in shelters, in buildings, on the hills, etc., where it is not possible to bring up the truck. The design of the station makes possible the speedy removal of the equipment from the truck, and establishing communication from another site. List of corn onents of the portable equipment 521. The portable equipment is composed of the following items: - Block fi 1 - Block 2 1 Line panel - Connecting cables (SZ-1 SZ-2, SZ-5, SZ-12) set - Telephone handset 1 - 5NKN-11.5 batteries 2 - Box with aerial and aerial feeders 1 - Package with the mast sections - Mast hoist with the wooden mast section - Packing with the mast rigging 1 1 1 522. The cable SZ-2 is required only in the case when the inter- mediate station is deployed outside the truck and both half-sets are remov- ed from the truck. When it is not necessary to erect the aerial to its full height, the nuMber of the mast sections for the portable equipment can be reeuced. Removing the equipment from the truck 523. In order to prepare the portable equipment for removal from the truck) the following steps are necessary: - disconnect the connecting cables from the blocks on the rack ? and the line panel. Only one half-connector SZ-1-3 should be disconnected from Block 3; - remove the line panel from its holders; 4110. SECRET 50X1 -HUM - disconnect.. I I 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ai'SECRET - 127 - - disconnect the telephone handset from Block 2; ? remove Blocks 1 and 2 from the rack; - place the line panel and Blocks 1 and 2 inside the knapsacks. In the line panel knapsack place also the connecting cables and the telephone handset; - remove from underneath the truck the case with the aerial; - remove the mast hoist from the truck; - place in the packing the required number of mast sections; - remove from the case the two 5NKN-45 batteries, and attach to them the carrying belts. 524. When carrying the portable equipment to the deployment site, the various elements should be protected against knocks and must not be thrown about. Zazzing_LthLloorlallisuingisaLfIrc_222:21ion, -?22.2212L?222LEM-2L11.1...22.2.Elt1211 .525. At the deployment site of the portable equipment one should: - prepare the deployment site, and take steps necessary for con- cealing the equipment and its personnel; - erect the masts with the aerials, taking into account the local topographical conditions; - remove the line panel and Blocks 1 and 2 from knapsacks; - Place Block 1 on Block 2; -,connect the cables to the line panel and to Blocks. 1 and 2; - lengthen the cable SZ-1 with the aid of the cable SZ -12; - connect cable SZ.-12 to the batteries; - connect the aerial feeders to the receiver and the transmitter; - connect the wire lines to their appropriate terminals on the line panel; connect the telephone handset to Block 2; - switch on the equipment, set the operating wave-lengths, 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM / establish the communication 4111111PSECRET Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? SECRET - 128 - 50X1 -HUM establish the communication, and adjust the channels of the station. 526* When setting up the intermediate station outside the truck, both half-sets should be placed side by side, The multiplexing blocks of both half-sets should be inter-connected by means of the cable SZ-2 (Figure 84). 527. A peculiarity of the portable equipment is the fact that in most cases it will be' powered from batteries only. Therefore, if the operation from outside the truck is expected to last for some time, it will be necessary to arrange for the batteries to be charged. 528. On finishing work, the equipment is brought back to the truck and replaced in its usual position. When installing the equipment inside the truck, special attention must be paid to securing it firmly in position. 11. Battery ChargihF 5290 When servicing and using the batteries and the petrol-driven generator assemblies, one should adhere to the following instructions con- tained in the station: - "Servicing manual for cadmium-nickel batteries"; - "Servicing, use, and adjustment manual for the engine 2 SD"; - "Form for the generator type GSK-1500"0 530. The station battery charging should be performed in the following way: - remowthe generator assembly from the truck, place it at a ? distance of about 15 to 20 meters from the truck, and prepare for operation; - connect the cable N-3 with the half-connector "12 - 27 V", located on the input terminal panel; - open the lids of the battery boxes and unscrew the vent plugs; 4111111,PSECRET - before charging ,.50X1-HUM nRcIassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET - 12V - - before charging the batteries, the level of the electrolyte should be checked, and if necessary, topped up; - start the generator engine; - the switch "AGR" ["Mobile Generator'] on the charging panel, to which the generator set is connected, should be set to the position Macz." ["0n"]; - set the voltmeter switch on the charging panel to the position - adjust the generator voltage by means of the'field rheostat knob. This voltage should. be 18 to 20 V; - set the switches of the battery group to be charged to the pusiaon qadowanie" L"Charging"-). With one generator assembly, not more than two battery groups can be charged at the same time. When it is necessary to charge more than two groups, another generator assembly should be used; adjust the charging 'current of each group to 1.25 A [th, The normal charging should last about 7 hours. When necessary, an accelerated charging rate is admissible. This is performed In the following way: 2.5 hours at a double rate, followed by 2 50X1-HUM hours charging at the normal charging current. 531. After 10 to 12 charging cycles, or when the station is not used regularly, an intensified charging should be performed once a month. The irtensified charging is performed in the following way: during 6 hours the batteries are charged at the normal charging current, and during the next 6 hours - at a current equal to one half of the normal charging current; if during the battery charging the electrolyte has been spilled, it should be removed from the battery with the aid of the rubber bulb syringe; 41111110SECRET - during 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SECQET I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? - 130 - - during battery charging it is forbidden to approach the batteries with a naked flame. 532. When the batteries are being charged simultaneously by two generator assemblies ,.the cable SZ-il should be disconnected from one of the charging panels. 533. Battery charging by means of the generator assemblies should be performed according to the above instructions. 534. After the charging is completed, the following steps should be taken: - set the switch on the charging panel to the position "Wylacz." L"Off']; - stop the engine and close the petrol tank cock; - disconnect cable N-3, roll it up, and place it on the mobile generator; - cover the generator assembly, and place it inside the truck. 50X1-HUM 12. Instrument for the Ad:iustment of the Telegraph Channels and Relays 535. This instrument serves for the adjustment of the station tele- graph Channels, both for uni-directional and for bi-directional pulse operation. It also makes it possible to estimate the degree of the tele- graph signal distortion in a channel, and to check the efficiency and symmetry of the telegraph relays. 536. The instrument is powered from a 12 V d.c. source. Its line circuits are supplied from a vibrator converter installed inside the instrument. The description, the circuit diagrams, and the principle of operation of the instrument for the adjustment of the telegraph channels and relays are given in the factory manual for the instrument, which is included in the station equipment. The external view of the instrument is shown in Figures 85, 86 and 87. 1111110"SECRET SwitchiM, ? ??? ?50X1 -H U M nRciassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 - Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 41110SECRET - 131 - 50X1 -HUM grEikhing on the instrument 537. The supply voltage for the instrument is taken from the battery charging panel. The socket with the voltage for the instrument is located on the left-hand side of the charging panel* When connecting the instrument it is necessary to pay attention to the polarity (4, -). The instrument power supply is switched on with the switch located on the front panel of the instrument. This switch should be set to the position "Wlacz." ["On"]. 538* When the voltage is switched on, the yellow pilot lamp lights up and the vibrator converter) and the pulse generator relay begin to operate. The pulse frequency (the telegraphic speed) of the generator is 50 bauds* The testing and agjustment of the telepaph relay 539. Before starting the relay symmetry test, the pulse generator should be adjusted to give equal length of the positive and the negative pulses* 540. When adjusting the pulse generator for bi-directional operation, ? the sequence of operations is as follows: set the switch "1 Meg. - 2 Meg." ["Uni-directional - Bi-direct- ion-11"] to the position "2 bie." L"Bi-directionalth set the switch "Sprawa. - Symetr, - Bad. ken." ["Efficiency - Symmetry - Channel testing"] to the position "Bad. ken," ["channel testing"]; set the switch "Bad, ken. - SpraWdzanie" ["Channel testing - Checking".] to the position "Sprawdzanie" L"Checking"]; switch on the power supply. When the power is switched on, , 4111 the pulse generator starts to operate. If the instrument pointer does not oscillate about the zero mark, it means / that the length SECRET 50X1 -HUM nRclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 416 SECRET - 132 - that the length of the positive and negative pulses is not equal; - adjust the pulses for equal length. 541. In order to obtain equal length of pulses, the knob of the potentiometer marked "Przewazanie" ["Out of balance"] should be turned until the pointer oscillates about the zero mark. 542. The telegraph relay is checked for symmetry in the following ways 50X1-HUM a) the relay to be tested should be inserted into the socket marked "Bad. przekazn." ["Relay testirgq. b) set the switch "Sprawn. - Symetr. - Bad. kan.' ["Efficiency - Symmetry Channel testing"] to the position "Symetr." ["Symmetry"]. 543. If the relay is correctly adjusted for symmetry, the instrument pointer will oscillate about the zero mark. If the relay is incorrectly adjusted, the pointer will oscillate about the scale division which indicates the percentage distortion of the telegraph signals by this particular relay. Measurement of relay efficiency 4111 544. After having tested the relay for symmetry, the switch "Sprawn. - Symetre - Dad. kan." ["Efficiency - Symmetry - Channel testing"] should be set to the position "Sprawn." ["Efficiency"] for the relay efficiency test. The efficiency of a relay, given as a percentage, is found from the expression : IC= 100 - where A is the number of divisions indical;ed by the oscillating pointer of the instrument. / 13. ? di. SECRET Possible 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? lb SECRET - 133 - 13. Possible Faults and Methods of their Elimination 50X1-HUM ? Nature of fault .. Method Of elimination 1 I When checking the receiver 1 or the transmitter valve operating conditions (see sub-heading 7) the Block 1 instrument pointer does not deflect, The particular valve of the receiver of of the transmitter is defective, Replace the valve. (The valve numbers are engraved I on the chassi near each valve). When checking the multi- plexing block valve ()per-. ating conditions, the Block 2 instrument pointer does " not deflect, j The particular valve of the telephone or telegraph channel is defective. Break in the circuit. Replace the valve. Check the circuit. The telephone or tele- graph signals from the station channels do not enter the line. Blown line panel fuse of the wire line concerned. Replace the I fuse. I 1 When the calling signal is coning from the direction of the radio- relay or of the tele- phone exchange, the bell rings, but the pilot lamp does not light up. Burnt-out bulb of the 1.pilot lamp of this channel and direction:i Break in the pilot lamp circuit, Replace the bulb. Check the circuit. The radio-relay station does not receive the call- ing signal the (bell does not ring and the pilot lamp does not light up). Defective calling Rep ace the signal receiver relay relay. RP-15 of the partic- ular channel. Break Check the in the "OZA" circuit. circuit. The telegraph signals do not pass either in the direction of the radio- relay, or in the direction of the wire line* Defective transmitt- ing or receiving relay type REL4 of the telegraph channel. Blown fuse in the line panel circuit concerned1 Replace the relay. Replace the fuse. 0 7 50X1-HUM 9684 50X1-HUM L Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 11110smcuir 50X1-HUM ? 134- ? No Nature of fault Cause Method of elimination Crackling noises in ear- phones, speech intermit- tently disrupted. , Defective contacts in the handset earphone, Break in the handset cord. Correct the contacts in the earphone. Replace the cord. No modulation of the trans- mitter by the micro-tele- phone, Defective handset microphone. One of the modulation ampli- fier valves faulty. No current in the handset Replace the microphone. Replace the valve. Check the handset current supply circuit. No power or too low power at the transmitter output. Defective valve 4,-FIL (L-1,), Replace the valve. 10 In one of the telephone channels speech does not pass towards the radio- relay. Defective contact in the switch an. rad. - Centr." Bend the appropriate springs in the switch. 11 No receiver hum and no con- respondent station signals in one of the telephone channels. 1 I 1 Defective contact in the switch "Kan. rad. - Centr.". Break in the potentiometer for the receiving level adjustment. Defect- ive valve in Block 2 WMCz, [Low frequency amplifier]. Re-bend res- spective springs in the switch. I Replace the 1 the potentio- meter. Replace the valve. 12 I ? The pilot lamp on the 1 charging panel lights up when a group of batteries 1 is connected for charging* Blown fuse in the charging circuit of the battery group concerned. * Replace the fuse. 13 No + 160 V anode voltage the transmitter. in Blown left-hand fuse in Block I. Same in Block 3. * Replace the fuse. * Replace the fuse. 5 * If the new fuse blows again, the appropraite circuit should be checked 411111PIECRE /No. 14 OX1-HUN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET 50X1-HUM - 435 - No, , Nature of fault Cause Method of elimination 14 No + 160 V and 45 V (supply voltages) in the receiver. Blown right-hand fuse in Block 10 * Replace the fuse. , 15 No ? 60 V line circuit supply voltages Blown fuse in. Block 20 1 * Replace the fuse. 16 No receiver, transmitter or line circuit supply voltage, or too low cupply voltage. Defective vibrator of the vibrator converter concerned. Replace the vfbrator, 17 One of the pilot 1.!mlas on Block 3 lights up. __-- Blown fuses * Replace the fuse. 18 After the batteries are connected for charging, the charging panel ammeter pointer does not deflects Engine revolutions are normal. Generator voltage too law, causing the reverse current relay to be inactive0 'Increase the generator voltage by raising the field current 19 After the batteries are connected for charging, the pilot lamp on the charging panel does not light up. Blown fuse. * Replace the fuse, 20 No voltage from the GSK 1500 generator. 1 1 No excitation in the generator. Break in . the field circuit, Check the field circuit and remove the defect. 21 Considerable fluctuations of the generator voltage and charging current during battery charging Sparking at the gen- erator brushes due to dirty commutator or insufficient contact. Clean the commutator. Adjust brush- es correctly. 22 Insufficient power of the petrol engine of the mobile generator. Dirt in the petrol pipe or in the par- buretter. Carbon on the sparking plugs Clean the pet- rd l pipe and the carburet- ter. Re- place spark- ing plugs. * If the new fuse blows again) the appropriate circuit should be checked.50X1 -4101SECRET / No. 23 50X1-HUN Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? 411110SECREIr -136- 50X1 -HUM R 11.o., Nature of fault Cause Method elimination 23 White pilot lamp on the mains attachment does not light up. No mains voltage, or burnt-out pilot lamp bulb. Switch over to battery power supply Find the reason of mains vol- tage fail- ure. 1 White pilot lamp on the mains attachment lights up, Blown fuse. . * Replace the fuse. ? 25 1 1 Voltmeter does not show any voltage. Green pilot lamp on the mains attachment lights up, Break in the volt- meter circuit, . Check and repair the defect. 26 I When the instrument for the telegraph channel and. relay adjustment is switched on, the pilot lamp does not light up and the telegraph pulse generator does not operate. Break in the power supply cord, Blown fuse Repair the cord. *Re_ place the ' fuse. 27 The telegraph pulse generator of the instru- ment for the telegraph channel and relay adjust- , ment does not operate. Contacts in one the RP-4 relays are sticking. Replace the relay. * If the neu fuse blows again, the appropriate circuit should be checked. 50X1 -HUM 50X1 411WSECRE Chapter Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1 -HUM ... 137 ? CHAPTER IV MEASUREMENT OF THE BASIC PARAMETERS OF THE STATION 1. Measurement of the Transmitter Power 545. The transmitter power is measured at rated voltages of the primary power supply sources. 546. For the purpose of the transmitter power measurement, a dummy aerial should be connected at the transmitter output. 547. Prior to the measurement, the transmitter should be tuned for maximum output power. The transmitter loaded with a dummy aerial is tuned by means of the knob marked "Obwod wyjsciowy" LITUtput circuitf to the minimum Of the valve anode current. This current is measured with the instrument located on Block 1, when the left?hand switch is set to the position "Nad.".elransmitterf, and the right?hand switch to the position 548. The power is measured indirectly by the measurement of the high frequency voltage across the dummy aerial, with the help of a thermionic voltmeter type WKS-7. 549. The power value is obtained from the expression: p _ V2 where: P . transmitter power in watts, V = measured voltage in volts, R . impedance of the dummy aerial, equal to 75 ohms. 550. To make the measurement of the high frequency voltage possible, there is a special hole in the dummy aerial shield. When measuring the voltage, the tip "W" of the voltmeter probe should be inserted through this hole in order to contact the dummy aerial, and the terminal "Z" should be applied to the shield of the aerial. 551. When measuring high frequency voltages, one must not use ? long leads. trap SECRET /552. 50X1 -HUN 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET - 138 - 552. The transmitter power should be measured at three points of u'he frequency range. 553. The power delivered by the transmitter to the station aerial, or to the dummy aerial may also be measured with the transmitted power meter, which has a scale calibrated directly in watts. 2. Measurement of the Aerial Feeder Efficiency 554. The aerial feeder efficiency factor is the ratio of the power P2 at the output of the feeder loaded with the aerial to the input power Pl. = P2 . P1 This factor is usually expressed as a percentage; % . P2 x100. P1 555. The measurement of the efficiency factor ii consists of the measurement of power at the input and at the output of the feeder. 556. The feeder efficiency factor is measured in the following way: - one measures the power P1 consumed by the dummy aerial when connected directly to the transmitter output; - one measures the power P2 consumed by the dummy aerial when connected to the transmitter through the aerial feeder; - one calculates the efficiency factor. The efficiency factoril can be measured by means of the thermionic voltmeter type WKS-71 ar by means of the transmitted power meter. 3. Mdasurement of the Receiver-Sensitivity 557. The receiver sensitivity is equal to the lowest high frequency signal voltage value at the receiver input, which would give at the output of the telephone channel a ratio: Vsignal _ 20 when the frequency V . noise 50X1 -HUM 50X1 deviation is 6 kc/s. 50X1 -HUM AP SECRET /558. Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SECREV ? ,? 50X1-HUM 558. The receiver sensitivity both for the first and for the second 7:elephone channel is measured in the following ways - when the station is connected for "self-contained!' operation adjust the rated output level (105 mV across 600 ohms load) with the aid of the station instruments, or by means of a thermionic voltmeter connected to the output of the telephone channel. switch off and disconnect the transmitter. - disconnect the aerial feeder from the receiver, and apply to the receiver input from the generator (GSS) an unmodulaced signal of the same frequency as the frequency to which the receiver is tuned. - connect a sensitive thermionic voltmeter, or a psophometer to the telephone channel output loaded with 600 ohms. - set the signal generator GSS output voltage value to obtain 5 mV noise voltage at the output of the telephone channel. The generator GSS should be tuned to the receiver frequency for minimum noise voltage value at the telephone channel output. The high frequency signal voltage at the output of the generator GSS, giving 5 mV noise voltage at the output of the telephone channel, and expressed in micro-volts, corresponds to the receiver sensitivity value. 4. Determination of the Operating Level S2Illaa_a121:_(the. Overall Attenuation) in the Telephone Channels by means of the Station Instruments. 559. The operating level setting error (the overall attenuation) in the telephone channels is determined by comparing the readings of the station instruments with the readings of the instruments in the measuring case 5alizka pomiarowg type "Ift". 111106SECRE7 /560. 50X1-HUM 50X1 L Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? -140- 50X1 -HUM 560. To determine this error, one should: - when the station is connected for "self-contained" operation, or when it operates with another station, set the output level at the output of the telephone channels in (both directions) to the normal value with the aid of the station instruments; - on the transmitting side, at the input of the telephone channel apply from the measuring case a voltage of a frequency of 800 c/s and a level of -1 N.; 4110 on the receiving side, remove the receiving relay and measure with the help of the measuring case the output level at the output of the telephone channel, comparing it with the rated out put level. The difference between the two values gives the operating level setting error; - the overall attenuation of the telephone channels is deter- mined by the difference between the levels measured at the transmitting and at the receiving end of the channel. Remarks 1) The normal telephone channel output level in a two-wire circuit ? is -2 N. (105 mV across a 600 ohms load). The overall attenuation in the telephone channel in a two-wire circuit is 1 N. 3) The overall attenuation setting error when adjusted by means of the station instruments should not exceed ?0.2 N. 5. Cross-Talk Measurement 561. By the term "cross-tale is meant the effect of the penetration of the modulating voltage from one channel into another. 562. The cross-talk in the channels of the R-401 radio-relay station is determined by comparison of the results of the psophometric noise measure- ments in a,channel without cross-talk (no modulation of the other channel) 01# SECRET / and in . . . . 50X1 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 . CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? Aik SECRET 50X1-HUM - 141 - and in presence of cross-talk (modulation of the other channel). 563. The noise in the telephone channel is measured at the terminals of the appropriate channel, located on the line panel, with the aid of a psophomete2. The psophometer is a thermionic voltmeter with a square- law scale, and a very wide voltage range (from tenth parts of a millivolt to several volts). Thanks to suitable filters, the sensitivity of the psophometer allows during measurement for the unequal influence of inter- ferences originating from different frequencies, ? 564. The block diagram of a psophometer is shown in Figure 88. A psophometer should not be used as a thermionic voltmeter for the measurement of voltages of different frequencies, or for the taking of the frequency response curve, as it indicates the correct voltage only at the frequency of 800 c/s. 565. The noise voltage measured with a psophometer at the output of the telephone channel, with a load of 600 ohms, is known as the psophometric noise voltage. 566. Prior'to the measurements, the Dsophometer should be adjusted ? ? according to its instruction manual. The cross-talk testing can be per- formed either with the station connectd for "self-contained" operation, or with two stations, located at a short distance and both operating as terminal stations. 567. Prior to the measurements it is necessary ti set: - the normal frequency deviation of the transmitters with the normal input levels at the inputs Of the telephone channels; - the normal telephone channel output levels. 568. The noise (cross-talk) measurement is performed in the following manner. One of the channels is modulated with a signal of 1000 c/s frequency and the rated channel input level, taken from an audio frequency generator 50X1-HUM lefrgSECR!rT /(or from the 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 40 SECRET 50X1-HUM -142- (or from the measuring case type ICz). The modulating signal is switched periodically on and off. At the opposite station, a psqphometer and a load of 600 ohms is connected to the output of the other telephone channel. The noise voltage is measured in presence and in the absence of the modulating signal in the other channel. The cross-talk voltage is determined from the following expression: 1-2 2 /U U cross-talk = ,. - 2 1 ' where: Ucross-talk = psophometric crons-talk voltage; U2 = psophometric noise voltage in one channel in presence of a modulating signal in the other channel U1 = psopbometric noise voltage in 'one channel after the modulating voltage in the other channel is switched off. 6. _Telegraph Distortion Measurement. 569. The telegraph distortions in the channels of the R-401 station can be measured with great accuracy by means of a sroboscope. By means of a stroboscope one can also determine the measurement error of the instrument for the adjustment of the telegraph channels and relays. It 5he strobo- scopi7 is included in the station equipment. For this reason, before making measurements, the telegraph channel should be first adjusted by means of the station instrument (the method of adjustment was described in Chapter III.). The telegraph channel distortions should :then be measured by means of the stroboscope. 570. The telegraph distortions should not exceed 10. 4. SECRET /62m214....1 50X1-HUN 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SECRET Rys. 1. Przeksztalcanie pasma cvzstotliwoLci: a pasmo cscstotl:woici annals snowy; przetaztaloosse puma CsistotliwO?ci ? ? , Figure 1: Transformation of the frequency band a) speech signal frequency b) transformed frequenCy band band 50X1-HUM KEY: (1) lower side band (2) upper side band (2). (3) (4) 2.14.442/a ? apea, 2,&747/0 8/1541t18! 1/ 12 tfaz ? Rys Rwir /trunk p,asta tLL4 kanalow telefonicisych I 14:egratlfzmych Figure 2: Distribution of the frequency bands of the telephone and telegraph channels KEY: 1st Telephone Channel 3rd Telephone Channel CRE ,(2) 2nd Telephone Channel ? :(4) 4th Telephone ChanneI, 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 - SECRET- ,50X1-HUM ? ? ? (4-) .??? . 4?1?? ei* ????? OM. %I OM I?1?4 ti;.,Z11,4;0 , (is) /4:1vfe (14, elear/47 AV (1q) 11,0# 1 (ii?) LAttitY2 /N4s) ROO 4f4kA'r 82 OM eNw./ Sala (17) Re 001 14" 0, -r1 7, Wear nit/4 7 71,01 - *tit tot IC Rys. 3. Schemat blokowy nadawcei czqici bioku zwic:olcrotn:,(-71:,4 Figure 3: Block diagram of the transmitting portion of the multiplexing block KEY: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (1o) 1st Telephone Channel Handset Amplitude Limit3r Low Frequency niter 2nd Telephone Channel Handset Amplitude Limiter Modulator Band-pass Filter FPI To modulation amplifier of transmitter (21) Band-pass (11) Transmitter (12) Sub-carrier frequency (fpn) (13) 1st Telegraph Channel kcia (14) Telegraphic Instrument (15) Transmitting Relays . (16) let Local Oscillator_G1 (17) Band-pass Filter FP2- - (18) 2nd Telegraph Channel (19) Telegraphic Instrument (20) 2nd Local Oscillator. G2 inter FP3 _ SfrDrr 50X1-HUM !let?10,111?00.001,4MMOMNIIPPINN, Prffilligrolwo Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 \ Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? SICRET ? #(3) ?? ? ,?. aia ntr cio 444, 40. 2'? 13 4i) ? - 8). 0.0 I (to) (tt 17 410. 441 a. (it //:r'' moo fr fiNtitow 1$049 k 100 11(i7) i;?1 [4- mg, 19 ? 07121/1 ? (9) Awixis atiernihr 14, t 4 fi..r.!M,er.+4% VorAce?vry oitarioruirj avid bkiturwi,e'efkr 6t.nierlia Figure 4: Block diagram of the multiplexing block KEY: (1) 1st Telephone Channel (2) (3) (4) (7) (8) (9) (10) Receiver Telephone Instrument Amplifier W Low Frequency Filter FMCz1, 0.4-2.5 kc/e 2nd Telephone Channel Low Frequency Filter FMCz2 Demodulator Band?pass Filter FP1, 4.9-7.0 kohil From receiver output receiving portion of the . .1 50X1-HUN (11) Sub?carrier frequency (fpn) = 7.4 kcis (12) let Telegraph Channel (13) Telegraphic Instrument (14) Receiving Relays, . (15) Rectifier (16) Detector (17) Amplitude Limiter (18) Band?pass Filter FP2, 8.4-9.2 kc/s (19) Band?pass Filter FP3, 12.1-12.4 kcis 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 MIT 2 45/ 0 Rys. 3.. Widino cmUytliwctici na riA7Y.2 41 ; ? //X, I 11111A1 I . /1 a 14,41?; lryjiciu demodulator* Figure 5: Frequency spectrum at the output of the demodulator (kHz 40 kc/s) nit 4,1".??-trAal tt'.4iceraw gn ? a ?...41 Figure 6: Simplified block diagram of second telephone channel KEY: (1) Telephone Instrument (2) (3) .(4) (5) Differential Transformer TrR Modulator Band?pass Filter FPI, 4.9-7.0 kois To transmitter Balancing network Rn Local Oscillator 4 7.4 ko s Demodulator Band?pass. Filter FP, 4.9...7 kohl (10) From receiver MITT 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? gnyi _1-41 inn Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 vibussa. I ? ? ? ? 4:1 r z a' laza' -I.C-7;er /!, C ? aVT' t Figure 7: The Station in march order KEY: (1) Mast hoist (4) Case with mast (2) Output terminal panel sections (3) Aerial cable entries (5) Battery breather opening 50X1-HUM SECtift Sto:a% ty&clo picAtctr;'yt.) : arZA St:10.4, 7 ).? r? Xl. 3 - Ira I. r tt!.At fl a? WI* (13:010. 7). 7 MilCiattltt FL7ure 8: The rack of one half-set KEY: (1) Rack frame (4) Rectifier unit 1(11lock at3) (5) , (2) Transceiver (Block 1) unit (3) Multiplexing unit (Block 2) Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 EWEN ? ? 5 8 9. Romlieszczenie aparatury w sarnoe'rvacizie: I pletu A: 2 ? sto ak pdtkcrmpletu 5: 3 ? apari.t li:1,,fonic1ny ? ? .* ce hntowe: 5 zespot spahnowo-elektryci.rky do ladowanla umu- - przystawka siecicrwa; 7.? wohonuerz: 3 ? szafka do narzed71 I czci zapasowych; ? zegarek Figure 9: Location of equipment inside truck KEY: (1) Rack of half-set A (2) Rack of half-set B (3) Telephone instrument TAI-43 (4) Line panels (5) Petrol-driven generator for battery charging (6) Main attachment (7) Volt-meter (8) Tools and spares cabinet (9) Clock ? f ? " ? * ? ? a. - t ;:, 7-?-4- cc ttrfrIl .11 . 8 / 4.? ??..1r et:!??,k 2). 3 ? ?. ?7'..te'rf 11.10: . ? ak:...=..actr...17. 5 ? ? ? ? 7 ? Masz7.1; 448:'.1T-4 8 C=AM-4. Figure 10: Remote-control equipment of the Station KEY: (1) Transceiver unit (Block 1) (2) Multiplexing unit (Block 2) (3) Bag containing line panel, handset and cables (4) Batteries SECRET (5) Rigging, in bag (6) Mast sections, in bag "(7) Mast hoist (8) Case with aerial 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 liDeclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? &men ? - 3 %Mt ..Yage? konstrukcjd krijIzairj. 2 ma=t-)-: ? podnoinak masztu: Kahle antenowtt: S plerwsay pool= odnigosr: 6 ? drug: pout= odrwow: trZetl pone= odttastror: 8 ? ergrar ;Kau= odetagtoir: 9 ? kolki odcialowe: le ? oar:slot dIa =vain sluiltoorero-elektair...nego: 21 ? kabel od zes-pohl 14,011120w0-eiektrycznego Ri U. Stkcia roralrlicta do pr2cy: Figure 11: Station deployed for operation KEY: (1) 'Yagi'-type aerial, of cruciform construction (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Masts Mast hoist Aerial feeder cables First guy-rope level Second guy-rope level Third guy-rope level Fourth guy-rope level Pegs (10) Tent containing mobile petrol-driven generator (11) Power cable from mobile generator SECRET 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 I -I 11,JIVI W Wel $ ET ? 147.72).777:t 091 10 ---??4 i i I (I 9) I t p_.A.,_ mi.t) oiaz i (14 a/ ; , ,? 11 _.,....L,......:_..._ ..,.. ___.....F....71..1 1 (2m. 6.4.'s7Z4 144.71/4' i ZI:j/L2tri1.*! (2.3) ? ' s____ 1 (t 1 i ' 61 14-11ar 014 ' Al'elt r 1i...4.. i..i (n) (ii) 1. ' ritie14- 1 .' . , . t 4.1 ...,141tpi ?.?-isit(171 ,. 21or/ (17) 119 Rys. 12. Scheme blokowy polkombletu przy pracy stacji w charakterze koncowej FiRure 12: Block diagram of half-set during operation of the Station as a terminal station KEY: V 1st Telephone Channel 9 Low-frequency filter, 0.4-2.5 ko/s 3 Amplitude limiter Block 2 , ) Hybrid junction unit UR (6) Amplifier 1 (7) see (3) , (9 Talk-call circuit9 Transmitter 10) Band-pass filter, 4.9-7.0 kc/s (11) 0.3-15 kc/s (12 Aerial 1 13 2nd Telephone Channel 14 Hybrid juncti(n unit 15) Local oscillator G1, 7.4 Z3 1cV:3 16) Transmitter 17 66-70 Mc/e 18 Receiver 19 Block 1 21 1 Transmitting relays 1st Telegraph Channel (2 22 Local oscillator G2, 8.5 (9.1) kc/s 23 Band-pass filter, 8.4-9.2 kcis 24 Local oscillator G3, 12.2 (12.8) kc/s (25) Receiving relays (26) Band-pass filter, 12:1-12.9 kc/s (27) 2nd Telegraph Channel ?50X1-H UM t , Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA:RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A03100001.0001-5 trititir I ( 6) I gia (1) iff:Vovai .1-0.01 etervIr %) 00) .7111,10/474ZI I Tr5 I L. _ I _ J eiwa2tied/ a /fa! (n) Jr-IYAt IrAc 1(3) Rys. 13. Schcmat blokowy polkompletu przy pracy stacji w cbarakterze koricowej z aewnqtrznym zwielokrotnieniem Figure 13: Block'diagram of half-sei during the operation of the station as a terminal station with external multiplexing. KEY: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) Block 2 Amplitude limiter L.F.Filter, 0.4-2.5 ko/s 1st Telephone Channel Hybrid junction unit Block 1 Aerial Receiver Transmission (10) External multiplexing channel (11) Reception (12) Wide-band transformer Tr6 (13) Wide-band transformer .Tr7 (14) Transmitter (kHz ko/s) SECRET 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Ct 1 (L) awsw ?, M.? ayis 71? 0???????????? ? ????,..0-????; ?77."' - ? (4+1 ' 7 kJ) ? . 4-7! .17-%1 -12.7. MI (FP e- 0) I? (4). ej li L 1 )C-1,..6.4,. 7.1r, 1 ; .- f 1 4,4 0 ? i 1 , j14 44, I ,.1.).., 0 1 1 4 y u'I., r_f_l___7_,..,_4--,?4- 4 ...-4 .1 AMA, .6431 (10 1 .?(4.74); icg4r49): I .IIC:,,,i4w) 1 ws44,,, 1 i -.4?Lr-j__..r.: , c 0-7 Zr,. t I .7,,i.p? if? I - ,.. ,. - I ' ii':?ii i ,,.. -,(4,4.415) 11,5% , . ( . vi-0,y1 ' - -14Y- /-- - 1-4, 1 06: ? .- fr7404 ":"" ' 101?Lir - n---ri Art;tzt 1)L-444 ? 4 *;* (1-71-1 01r7-,Jririmtlt ii t, ? 4...?,..i i48.).:41C:i , L.-...6;.1 ?1 it. f ) ;I Atsy 04 ,1 , r--- r--; - JW410'11 ' --/--: - r ? ; .,- 1.... .0 L77 si ..-- tr?-Lif:74,..,,,,,c1_,,54):,.. : i - .j W- ?74i& ii #i-714%,24 (13).: .:2 '' 044 1 4 1 i I --- - ; .-- ???..., 1.---* I 1-- idk+ f?? (11. ' (9)4.1 4 -" c1. Z .47; . pr..:. It th(J (8) e____ 1 1 omlu.48, i ze ' 4, 1...........1 1 1 01') . ? . (40 44 r--0% I 1 ra 21 41; r-4141'-"124_1!j-j't i 11 1 (6)/2/ EitA/ ei, . ? " An: g /12/1;i4i 1 ? (3) 1 Exty ?J ."4".: x4-- L___ili070 1(a) ? 411???????? Rya, 14. Schernat take,wy stetji przy w, araktervi, pf,A.redniej Figure 14: Block diagram of Station during operation as repeater station 0 KEY: Half-set A Half-set B 3 2nd Telegraph Channel 4 Repeating 5 Terminal 6 12.1-12.9 kc/s (7) Receiving relay Vlet Telegraph Channel ) 8.4-9.2 ko/s 10) Receiver ? 11 Transmitting relay 12 2nd Telephone Channel 13 4.9-7 kc/s 14 1st Telephone Channel 15 0.4-2.5 ko/s 16 Aerial 17 Block 1 18 Transmitter . ? 193 Hybrid junction unit 20 Talk-call circuit (21) 4 TF 0 Leaning of (21) and (22) not oleag Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SICHT ? ? Ity* L. Figure 15: abhor, Medi rOvidakti Prz7 trwrzezzam efairMirestassie Block diagram of repeater station with external multiplexing KEY: (1) Half-set A (8) Block 1 (2) Half-set B (9) 1st Telephone Channel (3) Wide-band transformer Tr7 (10) Hybrid junction unit (4) Wide-band transformer Tr6 (11) Receiver (5) Repetition (12) Transmitter (6) Terminal operation (13) Talk-call circuit (7) Aerial ada.,t M. St:he:mat L AtatiVat7) ? bloirviry pracypeilka.mpletu podcza dy?ego odbieru Figure 16: Block diagram showing operation of half-set during stand-by reception KEY: (1) Aerial (2) Block 2 (3) 1st Telephone Channel (4) Receiver (5) Audio calling signal receiver (6) Bell (7) 2nd Telephone Chann61 SECRET 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 IDeclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? relICT Ry.- B:c.;f: r. sun awr_ii)-(xibio7 co:ok :): Figure 17: KEY: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Transceiver unit (Block 1) Tuning knobs Transmitter output half-connector Receiver input half-connector Measuring instrument . Switches Vibrator converter fuses Type of supply switch "Operation - Stand-by" switch (9) AIC on-off switch (10) Potentiometer for (11) Dial illumination (12) Calibrator on-off transmission level adjustment switch switch ? 50X1-HUM (13) Fine-tuning knob for output circuit of transmitter (14) Front panel ? (15) Bolts securing unit to housing (16) Dial locking screws SECRET 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 OUA I - ri u iv i ? ? SEPPrv 3 Ryz W4dziz z C 1:413,n3:" axwcza-c4bicri=oc Po IWO:": Figure 18: Transeiver unit viewed from above, with housing removed KEY: (1) Transmitter block (2) HF Amplifier block of receiver Front panel Measuring instrument Measuring instrument switches (6) Tuning mechanisms (7) Type of power supply switch (8) Chassis (9) Half-connector Sz-1-1A (10) Vibrator converter of transmitter (11) Vibrator converterof receiver (3) (4) (5) Rs 19 Uldok z cou bid= na- drtrazo-ccNorczego po zdjeodu ' otradotry fplmetworofte ocichyloneY Figure 19: Transceiver unit viewed from above with housing removed (converters tilted back) KEY: (1) Transmitter block (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) ((1123i (11 Vibrator converter of receiver (1 HF Amplifier block of receiver IF Amplifier block of receiver Measuring instrument Instrument switches Tuning mechanisms Type of power supply switch Anti-interference filters Half-connector Sz-1-1A Chassis Front panel Vibrator converter of transmitter "Operation - Stand-by" switch SECRET 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SECRET l.)1\ I -1-1UIVI ? ? ? rt , ? ? ? I. ? _ 4 - .7 7 ? - ' ? ' ' . ? ? c*:: 6 ? . s s 41 ? 7; . .. 1?' Figure 20: View from below of removed (screening (1) Transmitter block (2) HF Amplifier block of receiver (3) IF Amplifier block of receiver (4) HF circuits (5) Trimming capacitor for correcting transmitter frequency transceiver unit with housing covers removed) (6) (7) Trimming capacitor for correcting receiver frequency Sz-1-1A half-connector for Station power supply (8) Front panel (9) Sz-1 -1B half-connector (10) Potentiometer of the AFC circuit (11) Qutput transformer n F-7,4:-..t.:7-2( Rys. 21. Sthemat bkcry rzts..1-7112- I ? gelmratar wzbudzaj. (L.--.1"); 2 ? tLc; 2 ? ? =adulator ettstatak (1.-42; $ ? 6 ? kZ-IM1 ? au:tcla Figure 21: Block diagram of transmitter (1) Master oscillator (L,3) (5) (2) Separator ffuffer amplifies (6) (1-2) (7) (3) Power amplifier (L-1) (4) Frequency modulator (L-4) Modulation amplifier of transmitter (L-5) Aerial feeder cable Aerial KEY: (1) From multiplexing block SECRET 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000016661-5 41.61iti ( ) r r"---T77;41 Cl/ (Is (if I - 1 r? r - * Lim 4 (2.) (3) f C 161 11 00? f.4 ! 112# L, ji I le.ST 1$ 01 I * Ti ???? b. ( rf ? j L. if f 3,1 'HA I r 4...c.?.0171?z; + Figure 22: Circuit diagram of the master oscillator KEY: (1) To switch W-3 (2) To valve 4 (3) To valve 2 7er 12 j 7/ (I) A I ? . f2'1.14?? 3 frit- I 2 L Rs. 23. Scbecut separatora Figure 23: Diagram of separator KEY: (1) To switch W-3 (2) To 014 (3) To C22 SECRET 50X1 -HUM , Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 .? Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5.A., SECRET 440 L') Artf.4*--c=1 t-C=t ? ?," I', I r tk.f 0.10 t0.1 ( f ?? .410 .A ? 4 A 4 1,41 Ryt. 2.1 Schemat mromsamimoua mory Figure 24: Circuit diagram of power amplifier KEY: (1) To W-3 (3) To switch W-2 (2) To aerial (4) To L-4 Rys. 25. Schemat modulatora ezestatliwoid Figure 25 Circuit diagram Of frequency modulator KEY: .(i) To,W-3 (2) To 033 (3) To W-2 (4) To L,5 (5) Dynamic. input capacitance Cwd SECRET 50X1 -HUM ; Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A03100001000175 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 IRA SECRET. VIVI' 410 41, Figure 26: Circuit diagram of modulation amplifier KEY: (1) To R28 (2) To R24 (3) To W-5 (2.) hiv 044, (4) To R19 C37 (5) and (6) LF input (3) sf.ti rT4t 124NlIcoorl Figure 27s Block diagram of receiver KEY: (1) Aerial (2) HF Amplifier block (3) IF Amplifier block (s) (4) Aerial cable (5) Output SECRET 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 r - flys N. Stilvtitost wAsttasIllariss sstslitiej ctystetiassoki Figure 28: Circuit diagram of HF Amplifier KEY: (1) To 1st IF Amplifier - (2) To C16 (3) Input (4) To C30 -(5) To W-5LY7 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 50X1-HUM 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A0310000716-601:5. Ivi? ? ? ? R. a Scttermci Figure 29: Circuit diagram of mixer KEY: (1) To L-7 (2) To HF Amplifier (3) To W-3E17 44 Rys. 30. Schernat wzmacniacza pierwszej czestotliwaci paired:AO Figure 30: Circuit diagram of first IF Amplifier KEY: (1) To L-8 (2) From mixer It= M .. - - - 6,-zo - - ? 11.4 ? -? ? "???41-? V 09 &x.LPar, 41W Yr' ag - -fait"! I. _ _ Etyt. 81. Schf=ta01 Wiladu dragiej przemi2ny cigstotliwoixi agure 31: Diagram of the second frequency conversion circuit KEY: (1) To L-212-17 (2) To L-9 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 vi MRS ? n if t 41- Aral &AV (1) kid V.t.ff (3) (4) Rys. 32. Sthemat wznacniacza, diugifel enstoUisvici pod),, ?. Figure 32: Circuit diagram of second IF Amplifier KEY: (1) To C89 (2) To W-3 ? AP- - , ? 1 (1) " I 441). 4 (3) To R66 (4) To R62 "Riri iv 111P" !"-1.,7 441 ..4. (4 /' ; '.... ,,,-........ . . 1 .4 i . Al, IIRIO Infl? I ? i?? ,110 Oft? , -.$ i 09 1,......14,41`,.ft-v-ri "7::,--. dil? .11, I ? i ' ?.". '*'..C;:)"..."'?41)11 ? .4- Re*M7474.7a , Ar.1.04V 16474121 kffirio-) pi/ TO. 13 sv..,??? t czgitotlivroici FiKare 33: Circuit diagram of amplitude limiter and frequency. detector KEY: (1) To L-11 (2) To LF Amplifier (3) To =Amplifier 50X1-HUM SECRET Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 , \ Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 4 SECRET ---- - 0 t i . 1 t 1 - fr47 rin.....7zzzi (2) I 41 JF 4 I eme141(3) Flys. 34. Cbarakterystyka czranicz=lica ? Figure 34: Characteristic of the amplitude limiter KEY: (1) Uwyj (output voltage) (2) Limiting threshold ( 3) Uwej ( input voltage) '4TYKI ? ".".'*. 4 a RIR ' ....,11, > *16 JP . ."*........ ?11.----.. `41'. ..."".????"{ i i ..:...,.....4.. . 6. .6.,..... ......? II ............ i vs.: it ....... ?- 4.. - 4 ......---...4 1 f ? ?40.6 4........... .........1 4 ...... 4 ........ ? 4.... ..... *. .............. ? no, d it,. i? .01 ..,?,..r......?7.......?.......? r__1_i_.. ..1, 40.1. ????????*. 1 i if.r, ........ . t.0.11.41......K.O.Mirroan/s10?????,. rr.......... t.allo7+40?104.21 it b 6 ...6.....06aW...................... fi?...?..... 4 IX i1 -1 1 -0 Cticratleryst)iti Figure 35: Characteristic of the frequency detector (kHz kc/s) SECRET 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SECRET Rys . 36. a t u~ rat a at! acza '7114.).ej czos tOlivroici Figure 36: Circuit diagram of LF Amplifier KEY: (1) Output (2) To point 'AI ?-?? -Of A,A r al ? 4,7 ? (I) 4, ? titc ea "ott 1 ,S3norr...ttla< 7r-te; kV, Figure 37: Circuit diagram of DC Amplifier KEY: (1) To point 'A' (2) To 1,4 SECRET 50X1-HUM 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 StCRET .50X1 -HUM Figure 38: Circuit diagram of the Automatic Frequency Control KEY: (1) To 145 (2) Dynamic input capacitance Cwd (3) To W.q. Ar170' (I) 441 . 40-JEC.: (L) :,.(..,4;f;.4.70..??ntrs:0? : sa' .?":177-4:t 4?3 ? Figure 39: Circuit diagram of quartz calibrator KEY: (1) To IF Amplifier (2) To HF Amplifier Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SkS161' ? ? ts Ttv4 41:42iic Figure 40: Multiplexing unit (Block 2) (1) Audio calling signal receiver OZA, of the telephone channels (2) Transmitting and receiving relays of the telegraphic channels (3) Handset socket (4) Measuring instrument (5) Step-by-step switch of measuring instrument (6) On-off switch of instrument (7) Talking keys of telephone channels (8) Telephone channel test key (9) Calling key (10) "Terminal - Repeater" switches of the telephone channels (11) Telephone channel type of operation switches (12) Bolts securing unit to housing (13) Type of power supply switches of the telegraphic channels (14) Telegraph channel type of operation switches (15) Station type of operation switch (16) Telegraphic channel test keys (17) Telegraphic channel polarity switch (18) Front panel (19) Vibrator converter fuse .(20) Housing SECRET 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET kRys. 41. IN idck z g.6:y bioku 1CZirotni er. a Figure 41: Multiplexing unit viewed from above, with housing removed 3 Rrs, 42. %VW:A : bt.ttNv tzieo- kzot.f.ler..ia -)o r0.3 cSda Figure 42: 42: Multiplexing unit viewed from above, with housing removed (vibrator converter tilted back) 50X1-HUM (1) Flexible cables connec- ting panel with chassis (2) Chassis (3) Front panel (4) Half-connector Sz-2 (5) Half-connector Sz-3 (6) Half-connector Sz-1 -2 (7) Anti-interference filters (8) Vibrator converter (9) LP filters (10) Calling signal con- verter (1) Flexible cables connecting panel with chassis (2) Chassis (3) Front panel (4) Half-connector Sz-2 (5) Half-connector Sz-3 (6) Half-connector Sz-1 -2 (7) Anti-interference filters (8) Vibrator converter (9) LP filters (10) Calling signal converter (11) Relay assembly Relay cover SECRET 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1-HUM ? ? ? SECRET Figure 43: Multiplexing unit viewed from below, with housing removed (1) Chassis (2) Front panel (3) Half-connector Sz-2 (4) Half-connector Sz-3 (5) Half-connector Sz-1-2 (6) Switches (7) LF Amplifier of first Telephone Channel (8) LF Amplifier of second Telephone Channel (9) Audio calling signal generator, modulator, and demodulator of the second Telephone Channel, and sub-carrier frequency oscillator (10) Band-pass filters of the second Telegraph Channel (11) Receiver and oscillator of the second Telegraph Channel (12) Receiver and oscillator of the first Telegraph Channel (13) Band-pass filters of the first Telegraph Channel 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 (#1 ? 1r ?????????10.1."0 ? e *.? ,41! J T, (I0 4'441 SHAFT (3),"1. - I.. .2.--ct rir v?i r .454-1;1. is .1--..- L7AlLti.;4 Artj 01g7i71 1.4;117) 1 19 jhl)r-ZrAitireq (0 f2r . .g:1471.4.-i2i.ttr757r1j,Dire, atiratia40 r Ate- ?I . ? WtrAr ?-?7,11;4$1:'' (6) - it2.41.77/ AK/ - 11,22,r,257 1.4izar4riV/X/ itmmilo,k=2-17a.teletracmtgo ihtzfir (6) 44.. Scheinat bk ? Figure 44: Block diagram of first telephone channel KEY: (1) 4-wire transmission: telephone 1.4 N, telephone 2.4 N To transmitter Terminal (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) Repeater Talk-call circuit To 2nd Telephone Channel From telephone channel 50X1-HUM : (8) From 2nd Half-set (9) To 2nd Half-set (10) From receiver (11) 2-wire: transmission 1 N, reception 2 N; 4-wire reception: telephone 1.4 N, telegraph 2.4 N (12) Audio calling signal receiver (13) Switch W-11 1-2 lead (2nd Telephone Channel), 2-4 telegraph lead 4-th Telegraph Channel; 3-4' telegraph lead, 4th Telephone Char i el ' (14) MWgneto calling signal receiver (15) Audio calling signal generator SECRET 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 1=litarerer id ' 4,z11:6' 50X1-HUM ? 1 ....... ,. 4 , 447 itrizzrzarbj20/ (3). if g 4-P:7,,' 4 gliritAt:JAI, )11--.., .0 10.-C:a- 4! ?(=)y.f-t=0.1-c=i6ertriTyrrip-t- , t ? .1 y I . .. Figure 45: Of) Ii ?Tz7 (s) .142,1 41A 4.7:n=t elz!= V=nr4k=iimpreg0 Simplified circuit diagram of hybrid junction unit KEY: 1) Transmitting portion of channel 2 ?To audio calling signal generator GZA 3 To amplitude limiter 4 2-wire line 5 Receiving portion of channel Figures 46, 47 and 48 - missire r------1;1 r.t?? AY v , . ?e..-- L.........4)..1 ,... . .., 4 t geT-4.1 i 1 ? ,t # 1 ILL.J!' ? . (3) afF24...............0.,;... , 042....0_,.....aesetzfrOkitl? 1 (I) frol:.:::444,21' t211 ....--.4 art/(0 41 Ali fid Aitry Pa/ Ric 419.SbemaL boika rez-u indukticn-airego Figure 49: KEY: Circuit diagram of magneto calling signal receiVer 2-wire or 4-wire input To hybrid junction unit From audio calling signal generator Transmitting portion of channel Bell Dz 1 SECRET 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Min 50X1-HUM Er (3)4iwoli7i7 1//c 04 P1 (I) P-I4 P Rys. SO. Schema; generatora zewu akustycznego # *NY Figure 50: Circuit diagram of audio calling signal generator KEY: (1) Audio calling signal generator OP1 (2) Call in 1st telephone channel (3) Call in 2nd telephone channel (4) Audio calling signal generator GP2 (5) To W-8 ? 1 ? J f 1 7 6 1 /1 IIU'il? L.v:?:11 Rys, St. Mx.rafttcrystylc.a tho=ieria Mu-6w ? 1.0-. Figure 51: Filter attenuation characteristics KEY: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Filter attenuation in nepers let telephone channel 2nd telephone, channel 1st telegraph channel 2nd telegraph channel Frequency in kcis - 50X1-HUM SMET Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 77577777:77---7 (4-)zeri treiaT ? ' 7' 11 Al.11?1474* (24 ,ftfo4riei, (3), elfet4-t 42.17,2,0, S 142:136(9) tedititim),2 I( Rys. J (Y) fr.-61-4,7i %, I-1.11)w: CIO .r.?-oft 740 ..2?41,171,, 50X1 -HUM ?. 4/zow/ip ScItanAt SkV.--cvy dructvo lrktoriktnriK1 Figure 521 Block diagram of second telephone channel KEY: (1) From audio calling signal generator (2) To transmitter (3) To telegraph channels (4) To T7 (5) Hybrid junction unit (6) Receiver (7) Repeating (8) From 2nd half-set (9) To 2nd half-set (10) From receiver (11) To Pg (telegraph instrument terminals17 (12) To ZZ (terminals) (13) To talk-call circuit (14) Level indicator (15) Audio' calling signal receiver (16) Switch W-5: 1-2 line; 2-4 telegraph line 3-4 telephone line (17) Demodulator (18) Local oscillator %MIT 50X1 -HUM , Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 r k4;efiAl SICRET :TR jr (24 14 t?-,00.* ? ,(3) R. $3, Schtmst modulator* Figure 53: Circuit diagram of modulator KEY: (1) Input, 0.4-2.5 kcis (2) output, 4,9-7 ko/s (3) 7.4 ko/s from oscillator G is Tre 4er If Rys. 54. Schematy wyjahniajace zasadc pracy modulatora kolow:ep!A Figure 54: Diagrams explaining the principle of operation of a ring?type modulator trtiorr 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A53-100061.0001-5 SECRET rN, w I prkdiw: Figure 55: Voltage and current graph (a) Modulating voltage. (b) Voltage of a frequency of 7.4 ko/s (c) Amplitude modulated current Rys. 56. Salernat generatora tskstotliwoici po:incinej Figure 56: Circuit diagram of sub?carrier frequency generator SteRET 56(1 -HUM iI Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Cs) .C4 Atutwae R-s. $7, Schemat blokov4 %TIM co Figure 57: KEY: (.1?) (3) ?i kailiy;s71.?V1 (7) Rys. 58. Figure 174,,4)944*(i) lel?4zeir/e/0001 nadzinika kanalu telegraritznerl Block diagram of telegraphic channel transmitter Matching attenuator From 2nd half-set Repetition Transmission Transmitting relays Ultrasonic frequency generator G Terminal (operation) To transmitter Line panel (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) To telephone and telegraph (0 1020.444/1/ /716(s) (6) lbfae,Erale channels Schemat blokovii kacalu telegraticreq,0 50X1-HUN 58: Block diagram of telegraph channel KEY: To 2nd half-set Receiving relays Reception (4) Repetition (5) ? (6) (7) (8) (9) Receiving filter From receiver Line panel Terminal (operation) To telegraph and telephone channels Sf CR FT 50X1 -HUM- Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? SfeRIT etterkgallt ,alittiltgarWeid 1202k us t ycznej Figure 59: Circuit diagram of ultrasonic frequency generator, KEY: (1) To K 101 (103) (2) Relay art (P . right-hand contact, L = left-hand contact) 4 ' "Ver/ell r4se 1.1 Cli.., lif/eVeAfig -4* --r# 1'1P C:=) 4voe 4110/0V 00/ .4" ""' I'Xivitzia(24 onif . ft,* 14 14,7-...1" Figure 60: Circuit diagram of telegraph signal receiver KEY: (1) Line (2) Relay arm (P = right-hand contact, L = left-hand contact) (3) To 1(101 (103) SECRET 50X1-HUM 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SICRIT tIt' i .I .....?-.- ....: i 1 4 ' ii ......k....??_,...? Li 4 . H, i i I . 45 IN' iit# II?f 4p/4 a Ala( e 47-1/ iRys. al., Charakttrystyka czcs to t liwc-kiowa odbiorniks kanalu i. telegralicznego Figure 61: Frequency characteristic of the telegraph channel receiver SICRET 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM , Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1-HUM Al (3) I. rik SICRIT ^r1f7jt ? ? (2-) Weo(11 ?4Y14W 40. zok, itz li5FU(04 -L AV! -kr RYL G2. Sawn:tat wlAczezda kanalow telegratacznYth: Figure 62: Diagram showing connection of telegraph channels (a) Operation of ST-35 sets with common earth path (b) Operation of ST-35 sets with separate directions of transmission and reception Operation of Baudot.set (0) KEY: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) Receiver Transmitter Receiving relays Telegraph line Transmitting relays Line batteries 227; ? left-hand, P right-hand STEM 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 oUAl -I-1 U IVI SECRET ? ? ? ElvzLA3.: Line panel (1) Terminals fOr connecting the wire lines ? (2) Fuses (1 Strip for writing down code names (4 Line transformer switches (5) Bell (6) Half-connector Sz-5Z17 (7) Half-connector Sz-6 (8) Half-connector Sz-7 .(9) "Earth" terminal s t/ Men: (?) #15 -ea Rys. 64. Schemat bk*crry rasltirdastacj Figure 64: Block diagram of Station power KEY: (1) To blocks 1 & 2 (1 Charging panel (3 Rectifier block (4) Mains panel supply (5) Batteries (6) Group 1 - Group 2 - Group 3 (7) Input terminal panel. (8) To 127/220 V Mains (9) Mobile generator PES-0.75 SECRET 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? Figure Charging (1) Voltmeter (2) Ammeters (3) Generator field rheostat (4) Rheostats in the battery charging circuits (5) Generator voltage on?off switch (6) Battery group switches Panel (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) Voltmeter switch Pilot lamps Fuses Reverse current relay 12 V voltage socket Flap Flap catches 1171. c6. pAn-crnky wilrratorowej Figure 66: Simplified circuit diagram of vibrator converter fDo Obciazenia" = "to loadf SUM 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? Figure67: (1) Transformer knob (2) Mains on-off switch (3) Fuses (4) Pilot lamps 5) Half-connector S2-10 6) Half-connector Sz-4 (1) ..trAtz-4ntat.of iff4 6.1.1 50X1 -HUM SIC RET Mains attachment (7) Half-connector Sz74 (8) "Earth" terminal (9) 12 V terminal (10) 127/220 V switch" 11) Switch locking clip 12) Housing k,t.c pnr% Ry. SS. Schernet przystrwW sfeclowei Figure 68: Circuit diagram KEY: (1) To half-set (2) To half-set (3) Switch 7 (4) Switch 8 of A mains attachment fd-n = socke?7 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1-HUM ? ? Rys. ?9. B:ck p7ostowniko..v (blok 3): Figure 69: Rectifier (1) Front panel (2) Housing with openings (3) Bolts securing unit to housing unit (Block 3) (4) Fuses (5) Pilot lamps (6) Potentiometer of the d.c. amplifier 7 \ 11,-1. stowaikbwP0zdAtsts Figure 70. livid* &gory bin13 pco- akittdcmy: fly&77. W3 z deal bldku, pro- Itcirekt-N po rifrg-ciu cbudirry: Figure 71: Rectifier block viewed 70: Rectifier block viewed from above, with housing removed from below, with housing removed (1) Front panel (1) Front panel (2) Transformers Chokes (3) Selenium rectifiers Paper capacitors (4) Sz-3 half-connector 4) Sz-3 half-connector (5) Sz-4 half-connector 6) Sz-4 half-connector (6) Pilot lamps (6) Electrolytic capacitors (7) Sz-1-3 half-connector (7) Sz-1 ?3 half-connector (8) Bolt securing block to (8) Fuses ? housing (9) Chassis (9) IF Amplifier potentio- meter (10) Chassis 50X1-HUM L Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 12 7?149.54 Figure 72: Mobile (1) GSK-1500 Generator .(2) 2SD Engine (3) M-22 "KAT(" Magneto (4) Screened HT lead (5) NA-11-10B sparking plug (6) Decompressor (7) Silencer in screen 50X1 -HUM petrol-driven generator (8) Fan housing (9) Exhaust pipe (10) Fuel tank (11) Anti-interference filters (12) Base (13) Securing lugs (14) Fasteners holding cover Figure 73: Horizontal radiation pattern of vertical aerial smE! 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ItYs? 74- Pozioma charaisterystyka protnieniowanla antenr posiontej Figure 74: Horizontal radiation pattern of horizontal ' aerial (04-ito 1 .... N 1 . itft . -, .,\ 1 ? .) , 2. ., t,,,, 7r1,7?;.?,' . , ? 41,4t \ 64, (I) ? rr: Si 7t Figure 75: Location of guy-rope pegs KEY: (i) Peg (2) Mast Figure 16 r TT 50X1 -HUM ? 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 MITT 50X1 ?HUM Rya. 77. Figure 77 ^ Figure 78 SECRET 50X1 ?HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 CI Ry.79. Przyklady rtItsprawiSiov.'ego rornicszcun:a nten: c. b prawiClcwe .Dfltittlefaczersie an - ten: c ? r.:eprziofwr torrn:eszczetue aracn ; Figure 79: Examples of correct and incorrect placing of aerials (a) and (b) Correct location of aerials (c) incorrect location of aerials Art4. Si). rnetiNda 4-11,14rd tani A- hr rpoNiptich kl ArWrialoctici_ Figure 80: Example of a methoeof checking for line?of?sight gfif Lee ?04 8, Sp?,s6b wyrcaexarla puakterx porrocraczyth dla u-ykrelltnia uk Icrzysrizny eemi Figure Method Method of plotting auxiliary points for draw . the aro of the curvature of the earth 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SECRET ? R. wykNilarda 1117-.NrCiu trAsy ?wrpsikiku br4k'it ,LptrAlnych ? b:ankit-te.ra-: Figure 82: Method of drawing the ?profile of the route in the absence of special tracing forms 6 7 89 Map Straight line connecting the location points of the Stations (A-B) Sheet on which the profile is traced Straight line connecting points A and B on the sheet Arc of the curvature of the earth Line of the profile of the route Local features (forest, buildings) Points of location of the aerials Line-of-sight 144 H44 1 I IllNs _a., ii Stab Aoore /(81:10m 11 a 1 Avow /co fig/ Rys. 83. Przyklad wykrelIania 1uku krzywirmy ziemi Figure 83: Example of plotting the arc of the curvature of the earth Vertical scale: 1 cm 20 m Horizontal scale:1 cm m 5 kms SECRET 50X1-HUN r. 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? (I) (1) ) . ? ? ? ? (3) .40v (44 (4) 4.7 ainieen7 It} t4. SITprolgtzetist dxlic23. kotcp:tetlrx? wyrAo&lych 2fz7 Tetramhcyinei ? Figure 8k: Diagram showing connections of two remote control sets during repeater operation KEY: (1) Line Panel (2) Block 1 (3) Block 2 (4) To batteries ? F--,77141 do zegulacil ki=e6-4, telev-eicmych ip7zekainLicow twidok z przadut Figure 85: Instrument for adjusting the telegraphic channels and relays (front view) (1) Instrument (11) (2) Ballast lamps (barretters) (12) (3) Pilot lamp (13) (4) Fuse of the vibrator converter (14) (5) Instrument on-off switch (15) (6) Pulse length adjustment potentio- (16) meter(17) . . (7) "Transmission" terminal (18) (8) "Eartlfterminal (19 (9) "Reception" terminal 21?:1 (10) Line current test press-switch . Key No. 12 Key No. 13 Key No. Pulse transmitter relay Base for relay being tested Power supply plug Front panel Front panel cover Cover locks Housing 50X1-HUM L Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 I 1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET 1-77:1.y.::-,id :tg,..az?., tti( tsrazi!.sh 1 ra-7,kp 4:widca. ; ut,(4.14 *II:Wm 71 ? Figure 86: Instrument for adjusting the telegraphic channels and relays (view from above, with housing removed) Instrument Ballast lamps Pilot lamp holder Fuse of the vibrator converter Frequency adjustment potentiometer Duct capacitors Strip with resistors Front panel Chassis RKM .0 relay SECRET 50X1-HUM 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? SECRET Rys. 87. PrzyrzAd do regulacji kanalow tele=liticzorth I, pt2ekanfitOw (widok z dolu- po zdjvciu obudowyr," 9 1-7 - _ _ 0 Input Figure 87: Instrument for adjusting the telegraphic channels and relays (view from below, with housing removed) (1) Vibrator converter (screening cover removed) (2) Vibrator of the converter (3) Transformer (4) Electrolytic capacitors (5) Frequency adjustment potentiometer (6) Duct capacitors (7) Strip with resistors (8) Front panel (9) Chassis (10) Base of the pulse transmitter relay (11) Base for relay being tested Filter- 50X1 -HUM Figure 88: Block diagram of psophometer HMI 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 11111 SECRET ? 143 ? 50X1 -HUM Appendix 1 Safety Regulations 1. The commander of the station is responsible for the observance of safety regulations during the work on the station. 2. Persons who are not part of the duty personnel are not allowed to remain inside the truck without the permission of the station commander. 3. When replacing fuses, the circuit concerned should first be de?energised by switching off the respective sources of supply. When re? placing fuses in the battery charging circuits, the batteries being charged should first be disconnected. 4. When repairing or checking the blocks removed from The rack, when checking the power supply circuits, and during other work involving high voltage circuits, there should be at least two persons present inside the truck so that one can come to the aid of the other in case of need. 5. When connecting the cable N-4 to a.c. mains it is necessary to wear rubber gloves, and to work in presence of another person, who can render assistance in case of need. 6. It is absolutely forbidden to conncct the ac, mains to the station, and to use it without prior earthing of the motor vehicle. 7. When preparing the battery electrolyte, and when charging the batteries, the regulations given in the "Service manual for cadmium?nickel batteries" should be strictly observed. ? 8. The petrol engine tank should be filled with the fuel mixture only when the engine is switched off. When preparing the fuel mixture it is forbidden to use a fire or to smoke. 9. When the engine is running, it is forbidden to remove from it the protective covers. 10. It is forbidden to lower the mast without using the hoist. 11. The technical condition of the guy?ropes, the locking hooks, and the circles on the rings should be checked before starting the erection of the mast. 50X1 -HUM 48IWSECR /Appendix 2 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ft SECRET -144- METHOD OF INSPECTION AND TECHNICAL ? CONTROL OF THE R-401 RADIO-RELAY STATION Contents of Appendix 2. Chapter I General Information 1. Introduction 2. Conditions of storage Chapter II Inspection of Radio-Relay Station 1. External inspection 2. Inspection of technical condition 3. Inspection of state of completeness 4. Inspection of the state of technical and operating documents 5. Inspection of storage conditions Appendix 2 Page 145 145 148 149 149 151 167 168 168 Chapter III Technical ContTol of the Radio-Relay Station 169 1. Measurement of energy drawn from batteries 2. Measurement of energy drawn from A.C. mains 3. Measurement of the high frequency power of the transmitter 4. Checking the calibration of transmitter 5. Checking the calibration of receiver 6. Checking receiver sensitivity 7. Checking the automatic frequency control of the receiver 8. Checking the levels in the telephone channels 9. Checking the cross-talk attenuation in telephone channels 10. Checking the distortion of telegraphic channels 11. Checking the resistance of the mains circuit insulation in relation to the earth potential of the radio-relay station 169 171 172 174 176 178 180 181 184 185 186 Chapter IV Final Remarks 188 111PP SECRET / Chapter I 50X1 -HUM 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? Ali SECRET 50X1-HUM ?145? CHAPTER I General Information 1. Introduction 1. The radio-relay station is fed from two 5K0-45 12-volt batteriesy or from single-phase A.C. mains, 127/220 V. 2. The level of interference in the telephonic channels, originating from the power supply, should not exceed: in the case of battery power supply; 1.5 mV per octave 3. exceeds in the case of A.C. mains supply: 0.8 mV per octave. The power drawn from the battery by one half-set should not during listening: 35 w; during duplex operation (using multiplexing equipment): 75 W. 4. The radio-relay set should continue to operate normally if the battery voltage falls to 11 V, or if the mains voltage drops by 10 per cent., of the nominal value. 5. The power of the transmitter at an aerial equivalent resistance of 75 ohms should not be less than 2 W, while if the battery voltage falls to 11 V, or the mains voltage by 10 per cent., this power must not be less than 1W. 6. The combined error in calibration and setting of the frequency of the transmitter at a temperature of +20?C. t5?C., must not exceed 11:6 kc/s. 7. The total deviation of the frequency of the exciter resulting from a variation in the battery voltage from 11 to 13 V, or in the mains voltage by 10 per cent., and the heating of the transmitter during 15 minutes, should not exceed -7.5 kc/s. 8. The variation in the frequency of the transmitter during standard weather conditions should amount to 6-9 kc/s for each telephonic channel, and 3-5 kc/s for each telegraphic channel. 111110"2SECRET / 9. 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1-HUM SECRET ? - 146 - 9. The nominal level in the channels at a frequency of 800 kc/s, using own multiplexing devices, is: - in a single-track system: input 285 mV (-1 N) output 105 mV (-2 N). A variation in the output level within limits of 86 ? 129 mV t+ k-0.2 N) is permissible: in a double-track system, without translating the call: input and output 520 mV (-0.4 N). A variation in the output level within limits of 425 - 635 mV (?0.2 N) is permissible: - in a double-track system, translating the call: input and output 190 mV (-1.4 N). A variation in the output level within limits of 157 - 233 mV (t0.2 N) is permissible: - when using external multiplexing equipment: input 1.16 V (+0.4 N), and output 105 mV (-2 N) - for an input impedance of 1000 ohms, and for a deviation which appears during operation in the first channel in the single-track system. 10. The limiter should operate in such a way that the increase in the output level should not exceed +0.4 N (in a telephonic channel and a single- track system) in relation to the nominal value, when the input level changes from 285 mV to 775 mV. 11. The frequency characteristic of each telephonic channel in rela- tion to the level at a frequency of 800 c/s should not fall by more than: - 0.4 N in the 400 - 500 and 2200 - 2500 c/s frequency band; - 0.3 N in the 500 - 600 and 1800 - 2200 c/s frequency band; - 0.2 N in the 600 - 1800 cis frequency band. 12. The frequency characteristic in the whole 400 - 2500 c/s frequency band should not exceed the level for the frequency of 1000 c/s by more than 0.7 N. 50X1 -HUM 13. The inequality of the frequency characteristic of the channel for external multiplexing, in the 3.5 - 15 kc/s frequency range, should not be greater than -0.2 N in re ation to the level at a frequency of 9 kc/s. 50X1 SECR Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? SECRET -147- 50X1 -HUM 14. The non-linear distortion factor in the telephonic channels must not exceed: - in a two-wire system; 10% for the input level of 285 mV; - ir a four-wire system: 4% for the input level of 520 mV. 15. The first intermediate frequency of the receiver is 6.6 mc/s, while the second intermediate frequency of the receiver is equal to 460 kc/s. 16. The receiver sensitivity, at a deviation of 6 kc/s, a nominal output level, and the signal voltage-to-noise ratio of 20:1, should not be less than 2 11V. 17. The output voltage of the receiver is equal to 1.61-0.3 V for: the middle frequency of the range, deviation of 6 kc/s, and modulating voltage frequency of 6.6 kc/s. 18. The attenuation of the image frequency should not be less than: - 22000 (10 N) for the first LP.; - 65000 (11 N) for the second I.F. 19. The attenuation of signals of an intermediate frequency should be not less than 125 dB (11.5 N). 20. Receiver selectivity: - when detuned by 75 to 300 kale, the attenuation should be greater than 10000 (9.2 N); - when detuned by over 300 kc/s, the attenuation should be greater than 125000 (11.5 N). 21. The combined error in calibration and frequency setting of the receiver at a temperature of +20?C.?5?C. should not exceed ?6 kc/s. 22. The combined deviation of the frequency of the first hetero- dyne of the receiver, caused by: changes in the battery voltage from 13 to 11 V, in the mains voltage by 10%, and heating of the receiver during 15 minutes, should not exceed t7 kc/s. 40 SECRET /23. 50X1 -HUI\ 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 0 SECRET 50X1-HUM -148- 23. The automatic frequency control system should ensure a 7-fold reduction in frequency detuning if this does not exceed i25 kc/s. 24. The thermal frequency factor of the exciter and the first hetero- + -6 dyne of the receiver should not exceed the value ?4 . 10 within the temperature range of from +5 to +40?C. 2. Conditions of storage 25. The radio-relay equipment should be stored in heated garages, with a relative humidity of 50 -75% and a temperature of +15 to +20?C. The storage of the radio-relay equipment in premises with a relative humidity in excess of 75% is not permitted. 26. General instructions on the storage of communications equipment are contained in "Regulations governing the handling of communications equipment in the Army", Laczn, 87/59. 1111101ECRET /Chapter II. 50X1-HLA 50X1 npriassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ill SECRET -149- 50X1-H U 1V CHATTER II Inspection of Radio-relay Station 4. Ekternal TamasIiaa 27. The purpose. of external inspection is to: , bring to light any mechanical damage; - bring to light any shortcomings in maintenance or use; - carry out repairs or muintenance work in order to remove the discovered shortcomings or deficiencies. 28. External inspection includes: - checking the housing of the various instruments; - checking the state of the cables.; - checking the aerials; - checking the handsets and measuring instruments; - checking the mobile generators and batteries; - checking the condition of auxiliary equipment. 29. When assessing the external condition, one should take into account the following points: - the motor vehicle carrying the relay, the interior of the body- work, all the components of the station and its equipment should be clean, and free from any traces of dust, mud, or other impurities. There should not be any signs of scratches, dents, or damage to the screening shields or insulating covers not should there be any looseness in the mechanical mounting of the individual assemblies of the station; - the knobs (handwheels) of the equipment should not show any trace of scratches or mechanical damage, and should rotate easily and smoothly, without any play on the shafts; the switches should lock clearly and accurately on all the operating positions; 44,04ECRET /- the aerials ..50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 40 SECRET -150- 50X1-HUM the aerials of the station, and other elements, which, during operation, are set up away from the motor vehicle, should be particularly carefully checked from the point of view of complet- eress and condition of maintenance. The guy-ropes and pegs, when packed, should have been carefully dried and protected against corrosion by careful removal of dirt and drying, while the metal parts should have been covered with a thin layer of industrial petroleum jelly, In their set-up condition, the aerials should also be kept clean, while the guy-ropes should not be tensioned excessively, During the autumn and winter periods, all the ropes outside the vehicle should be cleared of frost and ice deposits, to prevent them from breaking, Attention should also be paid to the state of maintenance of the aerial sockets in the aerial and in the BF transceiver block inside the motor vehicle; - the mains and mobile generator power supply cables should be free from grease or oil. The dirty place should be carefully cleaned with a dry cloth, whige the half-connectors should be cleaned from dust and mud, If the air temperature is ,1.-0 to -45? C., the cables should be handled carefully, to prevent their being damaged. 30. The result of the external inspection may be regarded as satisfactory, if none of the above shortcomings have been observed. 31. If the shortcomings and damage make it impossible for the station to be used normally, it should be sent for repair. The procedure for this is laid dawn in the "'Regulations governing the handling of communications equipment in the Army", Fart17", Section I() SECRET / 2. inspection 50X1-H UN/ 50X' neclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 40 SECRET ? 451 ? 50X1-HUM 2. Inspection of technical condition 520 The purpose of the inspection of the technical condition is to check the usefulness of the station for operation in genuine operating conditions An inspection of the technical condition of radio-relay equipment should always be preceded by an external inspection. 33. The inspection of technical condition includes: ? checking the supply voltages and the operation of Block 1; - checking the HP power of the transmitter; - checking the modulation of the transmitter; checking the operation of the receiver; - checking the accuracy of calibration and the frequency correct- ion of the receiver; - checking the accuracy of calibration and the frequency correct- ion of the transmitter; - checking the automatic frequency control system; - checking the power supply voltages and the operation of Block 2; checking the telephone channels; - checking the telegraphic channels; checking the battery voltage; - checking the battery charging system; - checking thea.c.mains supply; - checking the battery power supply. The method of carrying out the technical inspection is described in paras. 34 ? 52. 34. Checking the supply voltages and the operation of Block 1: (a)In order to check the supply voltages, one should set the left- hand switch of the measuring instrument (on Block 1) to the following positions: - "4-160 nad." Linad.1 = transmitter ? - "-25 V" 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? 41110 SECRET 50X1 -HUM -152- "-25 V"; - "+160 odb," ['odb.1 = receiver]; +12 V"; - "-45 V"; At the rated voltages, the deflection of the instrument pointer should lie within the limits of the black area marked on the scale. (b) If the instrument readings lie below the marked area, the station is faulty0 in this case, one should: - if the power supply comes from the mains: check the mains voltage. If this voltage shows the rated value (220 V), then the station should be sent to the workshops for checking and possible repairs to the rectifier block; if the power is drawn from a battery: check the battery voltage, which should not be less than 11 V. If the voltage is at its rated value (12 V), the station should be sent to the workshops for checking the possible excharge or repair of the vibrator converters. The method of checking the battery voltage is described in Chapter II, para, 48, below. In order to check the operation of the receiver valves, the left-hand switch of the instrument should be set to "Qdbiornik" ["Receiver"], while the right-hand switch should be set successively to all the positions marked with figures, from 1-2 to 16. These figures correspond to the valve numbering, as shown on the circuit diagram. If the valves are to operate properly, the instrument pointer should lie within the limits of the black area. In position "4", the pointer is deflected only during the operation of the quartz calibrator: for this reason, the switch "AZ-wyl." (0) position "Al0Z". "AFC - Off"] should be set to the sp SECRET / (a) .5.0.D.(.1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET -153- 50X1 -HUM (d) In order to check the operation of the transmitter valves, the left-hand switch is set to the position "Nadajnik" ["Transmitter"] and the switch "Praca Dlyzur" ["Operation -,Standby"] to the position "Pram". The right-hand switch is then set success- ively to the positions marked with figures from 1 to 6. The instrument pointer should lie within the marked area on the scale. (0 If one of the valves gives instrument leadings below the marked area, the valve should be changed and the reading repeated. 35. Checking the BF power of the transmitter. In order to check the power, the transmitter should be put on load by means of a dummy. aerial (to be found in the technical equipment), and the left-hand switch of the instrument should be set to the position "Antena" ["Aerial"], One should then switch on the power supply of the station and check whether, at the rated voltage, the instrument pointer will lie within the marked area on the scale. If, at the rated voltage of the power supply, the power is less than nominal, one should adjust the tuning of the output circuit of the transmitter. For this purpose: remove the seal from the shaft of the trimming capacitor located at the left-hand side of the panel "Oduod Wyjsciowy" ["Output Circuit"]. Set the left-hand switch of the instrument to the position Wad." ["Transmitter"] set the right-hand switch to the figure "1", and turn the capacitor shaft in such a way as to obtain the minimum deflection of the instrument pointer (minimum anode current of the power amplifier valve). Having done this: once again check the power % The check should be.carried out on three waves of the range (e.g. on wave number 2, 280 52). 36. Checking the modulation of the transmitter: In order to chekc the transmitter modulation, set the left- / hand 50X1 -HUM SECRET411 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 4111111r SECRET ? 154 ? 50X1-HUM hand switch of the measuring instrument in the transceiver block to the position "Wejscie Nadjnika" ["Transmitter Input], and set the switch of one of the telephone channel in Block 2 (multiplexing block) to the position "Kanal Radiawy" ["Radio Charmer]," Next, set the call switch to the position "Zee ("Call"] or "Generator :Kontrolny" ["Test Oscillatoel* The instrument pointer should be deflected* The amount of deflection depends on the wave number and 'is proportional to the amount of frequency deviation* The deviation is set with,the help of the knob "Regulacja Doziomu" ["Level Adjustment"], which is located on the right-hand side of the paael, in conformity with the table attached to the panelJ An example of such a table is given below* Table 1 Wave No* Telephone 1 , ' Telephone 2 Telephone 1 Telephone 2 Power 1 Power Tmer Payer Mains Battery Mains Battery Mains 1 Battery Mains : Battery ----- 8 28 54 66 60 58 62 58 52 j81 78 70 75 70 65 40 35 H 33 ... 35 31 30 39 33 32 . 35 32 . 39 Thus, for instance, in the case of wave NO 280 when the station draws Its power from aa mains and is operating on the first telephone channel, the instrument pointer shciuld indicate 60 divisions* When power is dmwn from the battery, and the station is operating on the second telephone channel, the deflection of the instrument pointer should be 70 divisions* 37. Checking receiver operation* In order to check the operation of the receiver, the first and second telephone channel switch should be set to the position / "Zenal Radiawy" 050X1-HUN 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 11111.SECRET -155- 50X1 -HUM "Kanal Radiowy" ["Radio Channel"], and one should check for the presence of noise in the ear-piece of the handset. Next, switch on the quartz calibrator by setting the calibrator switch "Kalibrator Wylaczono" ["Calibrator - Off"; to the position "KalibratorTM, and, turning the "Fala" ['Wave] knob, set the wave to Nos. 1 or 45 (these waves are marked on the scale with dots). If the receiver is operating normally on these waves, one can hear in the first telephone channel an acoustic tone varying within a few ko/s. If no tone is audible, take action as described in para. 38. 38. Checking the accuracy of calibration and correction of receiv- er frequency. The checking of the accuracy of calibration, and the correction of receiver frequency is carried out in the first telephone channel "Kanal Radiowy", at rated power voltages, and after the warming up of the entire equipment for at least an hour. The calibration check is carried out after disconnecting the aerial cables from the transmitter and receiver. One should accurately set on the receiver scale the number of the wave marked with a dot (No. 1 or i5), and then detune the transmitter from the receiver frequency by at least 5 numbers. One?should'also switch off the AFC (setting the 'JZ-wylacZ." switch to the position "wylacz"). The mode of operation switch of the first telephone channel in Block 2 should, for better audibility, be set to the position "4TG". When the telephone. channel test switch, "Kontrola I-II" is set to the position "1", receiver noise can be heard in the handset. One should next switch on the quartz. calibrator (by setting the calibrator switch to the position "Kalibrator" and, when an acoustic tone (up to 2.5 kc/s) can be heard in the first telephone channel, then the calibrating inaccuracy is within permissible ? limits. In this case, a MP SECRET / frequency ...50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 411111$ SECRET -156- 50X1 -HUM frequency correction is not required. In the event when no acoustic tone is audible, this indicates either that the calibration is very accurate, or that it is very inaccurate, TO check which of these alternatives is present, one should turn the "Fala" ["Wave".] knob slowly in both directions around the correct position marked with a line. If the turning of the knob to the left and right is accompanied by the appearance of the acoustic tone beginning with the lower frequencies, then the receiver is calibrated correctly and no frequency corrections should be made. If, however, no tone is audible, one should increase the rotation of the knob in both directions, until the tone is obtained. This indicates a considerable detuning of the receiver, and, in this case, it is necessary to carry out the frequency correction. In order to carry out this correction, remove the seal from the knob "Todstrojenie Heterodyny" ["Heterodyne Trimming"), located on the right-hand sidewall, and determine on which side of the wave-number marked with a dot the tone is audible. Carefully set on the scale the wave marked with a dot (Nos. 1 or 45), and turn the knob of the heterodyne trim- ming capacitor until one dbtains a zero beat in the channel. If the beats during the calibration checks were on the side of the lower wave numbers, then the capacitor shaft should be turned to the right, and if they were on the side of the higher numbers, then the shaft should be turned to the left. One should next check the calibration on the second wave mark- ed with a dot. The accuracy at this point should lie within the per- missible limits (acoustic tone). Having completed these actions, re- seal the "Heterodyne Trimming" knob. Note I. When changing the heterodyne and the fine-tuning circuit valves (L-5 and 1,-6)? it is essential to check the calibration and to carry out frequency correction. 2. Frequency correction may only be carried out by qualified persons authorised. by the commanding officer. 396 Checking the calibration accuracy and correcting the frequency 50X1 -HUM / of the ? ildo 111. SECRET Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? SECRET ? 157 ? 50X1 -HUM of the transmitter, In order to check the calibration accuracy and to carry out frequency correction of the transmitter, one should first carry out a careful frequency correctien of the receiver, The check should be carried out as follows: remove the seal (on the left sidewall) from the knob marked "Generator Wzbudzajacy" ['Waster Oscillator"]? and put both the receiver and the transmitter on load with dummy aerials. The receiver, with the 'quartz calibrator switched on, should be set to the wave marked with a dot, On the transmitter scale, set the same wave as in the receiver. If an acoustic tone is heard in the first teLphone channel, no correction is necessary. If no tone is audible, check for either of the two eventual- ities, as in the case of the receiver. If it is found that the transmitter is aetuned, one should carry out the frequency correction. For this purpose, set on the receiver the wave marked with a dot, as in the receiver, an turn the shaft of the master oscillator trimming capacitor until zero beats are heard in the ear- phone. Next, check the calibration of the transmitter on the other wave marked with a dot: the calibration accuracy at this point should lie with- in the permissible limits. Having cumpleted these actions, re-seal the "Master Oscillator" Icadb, 40. Checking the automatic frequency control. The operation of the AFC circuit is checked as follows: set on the receiver scale the wave marked with a dot; set the mode of oper- ation switch of the first telephone channel to the position "I". Switch on the quartz calibrator, set the left-hand switch of the measuring instru- ment to the position "Odbiornik" PReceiverth and the right-hand switch to the figure "6" (on the inner circle of numbers). Slowly turn the receiver knob "Pala" L"WaVe"], until an acoustic toneolose to the zero 50X1 / beats will 1111P SECRET 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 411.SECRET ? 158 ? 50X1 -HUM beats will be heard in the earphone. Next, switch on the AFC switch, and, if the pitch of the tone in the earphone remains unchanged, then no AFC adjustment is necessary. If the AFC is operating correctly, the current of the valve L-6 should not undergo any changes when the AFC is switched on or off. If the current does fluctuate, one should carry out anadjustment of the AFC circuit. 41. Adjustment of the AFC when the station is powered from a battery In order to carry out adjustments to the .0C? remove the seal from the knob "AFCz" ["AFC"] located on the .",ft wall of the block, and turn the shaft of this knob (the R[30 ? illegible] potentiometer on the circuit diagram) in such a way as to obtain no fluctuation of the L-6 valve current when switching the AFC on or off, while the pitch of the acoustic tone in the first telephone channel should remain constants Having done this, re-seal the "AFC" knob. 42. Adjustment of the AFC when the station is powered from a.c. mains. The adjustment is carried out in exactly the same way as in the case of the battery-powered station, except that one should manipulate the "AFC" kna mounter on the frontal plate of panel 3 (first knob from the bottom). Note In order to prevent the AFC adjustment from being diJturbed when going over from one source of power to the other, one should first carry out the adjustment as for the battery supply, and then as for the mains supply. 43. Checking the power supply voltages and the operation of the valves in Block 2. In order to check the supply voltages of Block 2, one should / set the ....s 40 SECRET 50X1 -HUM nRciassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 41111 SECRET -159- 50X1 -HUM set the "TF-TG-Przyrzad" ["Telephony-Telegraphy-Instrument"] switch to the position "TF", and set the instrument switch successively to the positions "12" and "160" on the inner ring of inscriptions. The instrument pointer should deflect to the right, within the limits of the marked area. If the instrument reading for the voltage being measured lies below the marked area, proceed as described in Chapter II, section 34. CO In order to check the operation of the valves of the telephone channels, set the "TP-TG-Przyrzad" switch to the position "TF" and set the instrument switch successively to positions "1,-.1", "L-2", "L-7" "L-4". The instrument pointer should deflect within the limits of the right-hand area marked on the scale. If, for a given valve being checked, the instrument pointer falls below the marked area, the valve should be changed, and the reading repeated. In order to check the operation of the valves of the telegraphy channels, the "TF-TG-Przyrzad" switch should be set to the position "TG"? and the instrument switch should be set success- ively to the positions marked "L-5", "It-6"? "L-7"0 "L-8". Further proceedings are the same as when checking the valves in the telephone channels, 44. Checking the telephone channels. By checking the telephone channels is meant the checking of the transmission of a call to the exchange and vice-versa, and operating "self-contained" [na siebie - see full explanation under (b) below], (a) In order to check the passage of a call and conversation to the exchange, one should first connect the 2-wire telephone lines running from the exchange (cr other sequential switcl5oxi -HUM 41P SECRET / device) os?oit 50X1 npriaccified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 40 SECRET - 160 - 50X1 -HUM device) to the terminals of the first and second Channel an the line panel (the appropriate terminals are marked 1-2 and 5-6). The "Kanal Radiowy - Centrala" ["Radio Channel - Exchange"] switch of the appropriate channel (I or-II) should then be set to the position "Exchange", and the "Generator Ebmiarogy Wywolanie" PMeasuring Oscillator - Call Signal] switch to the position "Call Signal". The operator should answer from the exchange, and one should test with him the speech vality. A call from the exchange is taken when the "Radio Channel - Exchange" switch is in the central position. The call is signalled by -a bell and by the lighting up of green lamps (under the inscription "Centrala" [vExchange"], depending on the channel). Note Instead of the 2-wire telephone lines from the exchange, one may connect up telephone handsets to the teminals 1-2 and 5-6. 00 By the phrase "self-contained" operation is meant the operation of a HF transmitter of one half-set with the HF receiver of the other half-set, or the operation of a transmitter with a rceiver in one half-set, During the operation of a transmitter with a receiver of the other half-set, the transmitter should be put on load with a dummy aerial, and the receiver should be joined to the aerial by a feeder cable. The transmitter should then be tuned to the receiver frequency (on any wave) in such a way that the mode of operation switch "Dymur Praca" ["Stand by - Operation'] should be set to the position "Stand by". The switch "Oswietlenie - Wylaczone" 1"Illumination Off"] should be set to the position "Illumination", the scale locking knobs should be turned to the left, and the "Pala" PWave"J knobs of the transmitter and the receiver in the two different half-sets should be set to the given wave number in 1111P1ECRET such a way 0.... 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 te SECRET - 161 ? 50X1 -HUM such a way that the vertical line of the wave number on the scale should coincide exactly with the line on the view-finder [sic - "wizjer"]. Having set the wave numbers, the scale should be locked by turning the knobs to the right. The switches "TF-41G-4TF" should be set to the position '2IT", and the "Dyzur - Praca" switch in Block I should be set to "Trace In order to send a call into the radio channel, the switch Radiowy Centrala" ["Radio Channel - Exchange"] should be set to "Kane]. Radiowy", while the switch "Generator Pomiarowy - 7ywolanie" ["Measuring Oscillator - Call Signal"] should be tilted to the position "Wywolanie". A test conversation should then be carried out. Telephone handsets should be connected to the terminals 1-2 and 5-6 on the line panel. The arrival of a call from the radio channel is signalled by a bell and by the lighting up of red lamps over the Inscriptions "Ronal Radiawy" (depending on the channel)e The testing of conversations passing through the telephone channels is carried out with the help of a handset connected to the conversation and calling channel, with the switch "Kontrola I-II" ["Test I-I"] in the position I or II? depending on the channel in which the test is being made. The handset of the conversation and calling circuit should be connected to the terminals marked TART" in Block 2. In the event of operation of the transmitter and receiver in the same half-set, the switches "2TF-1ITG-4TF" should be set to the position and the handsets should be connected to terminals 3-4 and 7-8 on the line panel. The remaining procedure is the same as in the case of testing of telephone channels during the operation of a transmitter with a receiver in the other half-set. 41111. SECRET / If the call 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 0 SECRET - 162 - 50X1-HUM If the call signal and the conversation are not carried by the telephone channels, one should adjust the latter* Note When testing the telephone channels, the remaining switches should be set as follows: "Retranslaoja - Koncowa" ["Retrans- lation - Terminal"] should be set to "Koncowa"; the switches "Etzslotowa - Koncowa" ["Intermediate Terminal") to the position "Koncowa"; the switch tnvielokrotnienie Wewnetrzne - Zwielokrotnienie Zewnetrzne - Koncowa - Zwielokpotnienie Zewnetrane Dia Retranslacji" ["Internal Multiplexing - External Multiplexing - Terminal - External Multiplexing for retranslationfti into the position "Internal Multiplexing". 45. The adjustment of telephone channels. The adjustment of the telephone channels consists of adjustment of the transmission measuring level and of the reception measuring level. (a) In order to adjust the transmission measuring level in the I telephone channel, the switch of the measuring instrument in Block 2, "TF-TG-Przyrzad" ["Telephone-Telegraph-Instrument") should be set to the position "TF", and the knob of the measuring instrument should be set to "Generator Pomiarowy I" ("Measuring Oscillator 1"). .The switch "Generator Ebmiarowy - Wywolanie" ["Measuring Oscillator - Cali Signal."] should be set to "Generator Ebmiarowy" and, by turning the potentiometer shaft of this oscillator, set the instrument pointer to the figure 50. On the (transceiver) Block 1, set the left-hand switch of the measuring instrument to the position "Wejscie I" ["Input I"J, and on Block 2 set the position of the switch "Kanal Radiowy Centrala" ["Radio Channel - Exchange"] to "Ronal Radiowy I", The shaft of the "Ustawienie Poziomu" ['Level Setting"] potentiometer in Block 1 should then be rotated in such a manner as to secure that the deflection of the instrument pointer agrees with the table of deviations, attached to the panel of the given half-set. During this adjustment, / a bell 41111111 SECRET 50X1-HUM 50X1 nRciassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET - 163 - 50X1 -HUM a bell should be ringing on the transmission sides In order to adjust the transmission measuring level in the II telephone channel, the knob of the measuring instrument should be set to the ppsition nGenerator Pomiarowy II" ["Measuring Oscillator II"], and the switch "Kanal Pomiarowy II - Centrals"- ["Messuring Channel II Exchange"] to the position "Kanal Radiowy II" ["Radio Channel II"]. One should no longer carry out adjustments of the frequency deviation by means of the "Ustawienie Poziomu" Setting"1 potentiometer, or the "Generator Pomiarowy" potentiometer in Block 2. In order to adjust the reception measuring level in the I telephone channel, the knob of the measuring instrument in Block 2 should be set to the position "Poziom I" ["Level V]. (U1)? and the switch "Kanal Radiowy Centrals" should be set to "Kanal Radiowy". Next, turning the shaft of the potentio- meter "I", set the deflection of the. instrument pointer to the figure "50. Abell should ring during the reception of the mOusuring level. In order to adjust the reception measuring level in the II telephone channel, the knob of the measuring instrument should be set to the position "Poziom II" (Us), and the adjustment made with potentiometer "II", similarly as in the first telephone channel. 46. Testing the telegraphic channels. In order to test the telegraphic channels, one should make the following reconnections: set the switch of the "TF-TG-Przyrzad" measuring instrument in Block 2 to the position "TG"; set the "Bodo - Simpleks ST-35" switches to the position "Bodo" ["Baudot"].. Set the "Kontrola - Praca" ["Testing - Operation"] switches to the positions "9.1" and 4208". When the measuring instrument switch is set in the positions "8.5-9.1" (for the first telegraphic channel), and "1202-12.8" (for the second telegraphic channel), the pointer should deflect to the 50X1 -HUM 41111. SECRET / right Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T002-4-8A631.066010001-5 i4s. 15 ? Ifizihrglir 1:272=1"(g) ' Figure 15 KEY: (1) Dummy aerial, 75 ohms; (2) Transmitter; (3) Receiver; (4) R-401 Half-sets; (5) Acoustic generator; (6) Harmonio analyser. ", ? Figure 16 ????.?????????????????? 4?10. .11101?114 KEY: (1 Dummy aerial, 75 ohms; (2) Transmitter; (3) Receive/r; (4 Stroboscope. ! , St CRET 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 OP SECRET - 10, - 50X1-HUM right, into the marked area. The "Kontrola - Praca" switches should be set in turn to the position "8.5" and "12.2" and, at the same settings of the measuring instrument switch, the pointer should deflect to the left, into the marked area. Finally, one should check the deviation of the transmitter frequency obtained from each telegraphic channel. For this purpose, the left-hand switch of the measuring instrument in Block i should be set to the position "Wejscie Nadajnika" ["Transmitter Input"], while the "Kontrola Fraca" ["Testing - Operation"} switches InIaock 2 should be successively set to "Fraca". The instrument pointer in Block I should deflect in accord- ance with the frequency deviation table attached to the panel of the half- set concerned. Note The switches located on the right-hand side of Block 2 should be set in the following positions: the switches "Akumulatory - Wylaczone Siec" ["Battery - Off - Mains"] should be in the "Tottery" or "Mains" position, depending on the source of supply. The switches "Retranslacja - Koncawa" ["Retranslation Terminal"] should be in the positiion "Koncowa", and the switches "Nbrmalnie - Odwrotnie" ["Normal Reverse".] in the position "Nbrmalnie". 47. Adjustment of telegraphic channels. The adjustment of telegraphic channels is carried out with the help of an instrument for adjusting telegraphic relays and channelsvwhich forms part of the technical equipment of the radio-relay station. In order to adjust the telegraphic channels, the instrument terminal "Nadawanie" ["Transmission"] should be connected to the terminal "11" (when adjusting the first telegraphic channel) or "13" (when adjust- ing the second telegraphic channel), located on the line panel. The instrument terminal "Odbior" ["Reception"] should be similarly connected to the terminals "12" or "14", and the instrument terminal "Z" ("Earth") should be connected to the "Earth" of the line panel. The switches "Bodo-Simpleks - ST-35" and "Kontrola - Fraca" of the channels being 410 SECRET / adjusted 50X1-HUM 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SECRET ? ? ? - 165 - 50X1 -HUM adjusted should be set to the positions "Bodo"' ["Baudot"] and 'Trace ["Operation"]. The switch on the instrument, "Impulsy Dwtbiegunowe - Impulsy Jednobiegunowe" ["Bi-polar pulses - Uni-polar pulses"] should be set to "Bi-polar pulses The switch ''1Arysylanie - Neutralne.- Proba Kanalu" ["Sending Neutral - Channel Test.] should be set to "Channel Test", and the switch "Proba Kanalu Kontrola" jhannel Test - Checking"] to the posi6ion "Checking". The instrument should then be connected to the power supply. . For this purpose, the cord with the jack should be connected to the 12 V d.o, socket (paying attention to the voltage polarity), and the switch on the instrument set to "WlaczOne" ["On"]. The knob "Reg. Czasu Trwania Impulse ['Pulse Duration Adjustment"]? located on the instrument, should be turned in such a way as to make the instrument pointer oscillate around the zero readings This will indicate that the duration of the emitted positive and negative pulses is approximately equal., -The switch "Proba Kanalu - Kontrole ["Channel Test - Checking"] should then be set to the position "Channel Test". The standard telegraphic pulses will then be fed to the transmitting side of the telegraphic, channel, while from the receiving side, the pulses will be fed to the measuring instrument circuit. In order to adjust the line current in the telegraphic. channels, one should depress the press-switch "Prad Liniowy" Current"] on the adjusting instrument, while the testing instrument switch in Block 2 should be set to "Prad Liniowy I" or "Prad. Liniowy II", depending on the channel being adjusted. Turning the "Prad Liniowy" knob in Block 2, set the instrument pointer to the figure "25". Having made this adjust- ment, turn the shaft of the potentiometer "Reg. Czaau Trwania Imp" ["Pulse Duration Adjustment"] (of the first and second telegraphic channel), so ,as to make the pointer of the milliammeter on the adjusting instrument / oscillate around 60060 SECRET 50X1 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 41110 SECRET ? ? -166- 50X1 -HUM oscillate around the zero reading. 48. Checking the battery voltage. Three groups of batteries are provided to supply the pager for each half-set. Each group consists of two batteries tyi.-e 5NRN-45. In order to check the voltage of a particular battery, the switch "Agregat -I- II-III" ["Mobile Generator /2 //2 III"] on the charging panel should be set tO the position "I", "II", or "III", depending on the group the voltage of which is to be measured. The voltage is shown by the left-hand instrument on the charging panel, and should read 12 Vpand not be less than 11 V. If the voltage is less than 11 V0 the group concerned should be 'Alt on charge with the help of a petrol-drive generator? type FES-00759 49. Checking the battery charging. In order to check the charging of a group of batteries, the PES.-0075 petrol-driven generator should be placed at a distance of 15 to 20 metres from the vehicle, and be connected by an "N-3" cable to the half- connector on the input panel labelled "12-27 V"-. The battery case covers should be taken off, and the battery vent plugs removed. The "Wylaczone - Wlaczone" ["Off - On") switch on the charging panel should be set to "On", and the "AGR. switch should be set to "AGR." ["Mobile Generator"]. Having started up the generator by turning the knob "Agregat Ftad Wzbudzenia" ["Mobile Generator - Exciting Current"], the voltage should be set within the limits of 18 - 20 V, on the voltmeter (left-hand instrument). Depending on the group being charged, the switch "Ladowanie Wylaczone - Rozladowanie" ["charge - Off - Discharge"] should be set to "(Marge", and the "Ptad Ladowania" ["Charging Current") knob on the instrument of the group being charged should be set to a current of 11.25 A. If a current of this value cannot be attained, the charging panel and the mobile generator should be checked in the workshops.. Any blown fuses on the charging panel should be replaced on the spot. alkSECRET / Note ....0 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ?167? Note Only two groups of batteries may be charged simultaneously from one mobile generator. 50X1-HUM 50. Checking the power from ana.c.mains supply. If the station is powered from the mains with a voltage of 220 V, the switch "127 V - 220 V" on the mains panel should be set to the position "220 V". Having connected the mains through a cable to the socket outlet on the mains panel labelled "127 - 220 V"? the switch on the mains panel should be set to the "Wlaczone" ["On"] position, and the voltage 127 V should be set on the voltmeter by means of the auto-transformer kndb. The switch "Siec Wylaczone - Akumulatory"blains - Off - Battery".1 in Block 1 should be set to the position 'T[ains". The "Akumulatory Wylaczone - Siec" switches in the telegraphic' channels of Block 2 should also be set to the position "Mains". It is then possible to test the voltage in Blocks 1 and 2. Nate Before connecting up the mains voltage, the vehicle should be earthed. 51. Checking the power from batteries. One half-set is powered by one group of batteries. In order to test this supply, the switch "Siec Wylaczone - Akumulatory" in Blocks 1 and 2 should be set to the position "Battery", and the "Ladawanie Wylaczone Rozladowanie" ["charge - Off - Discharge") switch on the charging panel should be set to "Discharge". 52. The radio-relay station may be regarded as technically efficient when the readings listed in paras. 34 - 51 above have not exceed- ed the permissible limits Lail dawn for the relay station. 3, Inspection of state of completeness 53. The purpose of this inspection is to check the quantity and quality of the technical equipment of the radio-relay station. / 54, 41111110 SECRET 50X1-HUM , Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 _ Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? 168 ? 54. The inspection should include: - a check of the quality and state of maintenance of all the component parts of the set; - a comparison of the actual number of items with the number listed in the equipment log-book. 55. The result of the inspection is regarded as favourable when the number oZ items composing the set corresponds to the list, and their quality is satisfactory. 50X1-HUM 4. Ins ection of the state of technical and operating documents 56. The purpose of this inspection is to check up on the correctness of upkeep and state of maintenance of technical and operating documents. 57. The inspection should cover: checking the existence and state of maintenance of operating manuals, diagrams, and equipment log-books; - checking the correctness; care, and accuracy of keeping up entries in the equipment log-books, their content, and method of making corrections,. 58. The inspection of documents may be regarded as completed favourably when no document shortages have been found, nor have there been any shortcomings in the upkeep of equipment log-books. 5. Inspection of storage conditions 59. The purpose of this inspection is to check on the observance of the principles and conditions of storage of radio-relay equipment. SO. During the inspection, one should confirm whether the storage and protection conditions conform to paras. 25 and 26 above. 61. The results of the inspection of storage conditions may be regarded as satisfactory when no shortcomings have been found in the storage or protection of the radio-relay equipment. 40 SECRET clapter III 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 41111V SECRET - 169 - CHAPTER III 50X1 -HUM Technical Control of the Radio-Relay Station 62. Technical control is carried out in order to establish whether the radio-relay station is fulfilling the basic technical requirements, and to assess its combat readiness. 63. Technical control includes the actions covered by inspections, and the following measurements: - the power drawn from the batteries and from the a.c. mains; - HF power of the transmitter; - receiver sensitivity; - receiver AFC; - telephone channel levels; - cross-talk attenuation of telephone channels; - distortion of telegraphic channels; - resistance of the mains circuit insulation in relation to the earth potential of the radio-relay station. 1. Measurement of energy drawn from batteries 64. The supply of energy from the batteries should conform to point 12 of the TW LI-7, according to which the power drawn by one half-set when standing by should not exceed 35 W (3 A), with the transmitter switched off, and 75 W (6.3 A) with the transmitter switched on, when the battery voltage is 12 V. The batteries are mounted in a case, and are inter-connected as shown in the circuit diagram in Figure 1. 65. In order to measure the power drawn, one should open the battery case, disconnect the end of the positive lead from the battery being tested, and connect up the positiva terminal of the ammeter to the pofAtive terminal 11111PSECRET / of the battery. ... 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? AO SECRET -170- 50X1 -HUM of the battery. The negative terminal of the ammeter should be connected to the lead which has been disconnected from the battery. Simultaneously, the positive terminal of a voltmeter should be connected to the positive terminal cf the battery, and the negative terminal of the voltmeter should be connected to the negative terminal of the battery. The lay-out is shown in Figure 2. The power supply from the battery to the half-set should then be ,switched on as described in paragraph 519 Chapter II. 66. Having read off the current and voltage values, the power being drawn should be calculated from the formula P . V . I whores P = power consumed, in Wa'As3 V = battery voltage, in Volts; I = current drawn, in Amperes. 67. The following instruments should be used for the measurementst - a d.c. ammeter, with a measurement range not less than 10 A, and an accuracy not less than 1.5%; - a d.c. voltmeter, with a measurement range not less than 15 V, and an accuracy not less than 1.5%. 68. The measurement should be made very carefully, to prevent the short-circuiting of any of the batteries. After taking the measurement the case should be closed. 69. The results of the measurements should be entered in Table 1. Table 1. No. Factory No. of radio- relay half- set. Standing by L Operating Temp. oc. Humi- dity a 10 U in V I in A P in W U in V I in A P in W , Notes The measurements should be taken with the vehicle and trans- mitter and receiver scale illumination switched off. 11110SECRET 50X1 -HUM 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/98/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 INPSE7ET _ 171 _ 50X1-HUM 2. Measurement of energy drawn from a.c. mains 70. The power drawn from the a.c. mains by one half-set standing by (transmitter switched off) should not exceed 65W (0.3 A), and with the transmitter switched on, 150 W (0.7 A), when the maias voltage is 220 V. The power drawn from the a.c. mains by two half-sets on full load (the vehicle and the transmitter and receiver scale illumination switched on, and a call being sent out) should not exceed 340 W. The permissible power to be drawn from the a.c. mains is defined in the user instructions of the R-401 radio-relay station; it is not defined in the TW-/7 - of. paragraph 64 above: this appears to refer to some general signals instructionS7. 71. In order to measure the power being consumed, one should make the following connections: the mains cable-end leading to the half- connector should be connected to the input panel of the vehicle labelled "127 - 220". At the other end of the cable, one of the.wires should be connected direct to one of the terminals of the 220 V mains panel, and the other wire to one terminal of an ammeter. The other +.erminal of the ammeter should be connected to the second terminal on the mains panel. Simultaneously, a voltmeter should be connected in parallel across the mains terminals. A simplified lay-out of the connections is shown in Figure 3. One should then switch on the power to the half-set being measured, as described in Chapter II, paragraph 50, above. Having read off the current and the voltage values, the power consumed should be calculated according to the formula: P .UsI where: P = power consumed, in Watts, U = mins voltage, in Volts; I = current drawn, in Amperes. 411111P SECRET 50X1-HUM / The results . 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 40 SECRET - 172 - The results obtained from the readings should be entered in Table 1. The following instruments should be used for the tests: - an a.c. ammeter, with a measurement range not less than 2 AI and an accuracy not less than 1.5%; - an a.c. voltmeter, with a measurement range not less than 300 V and an accuracy not less than 1.5%. 50X1-HUM 3. Measurement of the HF power of the transmitter 72. The value of the HF power of the transmitter is defined in points 16 and 17 of the WT. At normal supply voltages (127 V a.c., measured with a voltmeter at the mains panel inside the vehicle, and 12 V d.c. from the batteries, measured with a voltmeter at the charging panel), the power should be not less than 2 W. The power measurement may be carried out: - with the help of an HF power meter; - with the help of a milliammetor with a thermo-couple and a non- inductive resistor of a value of 75 ohms. (a) Measurement with the help of an HF meter: In order to carry out this measurement, the power meter should be connected to the transmitter output socket by means of a short length of co-axial cable (20-30 ems), with a wave impedance of 75 ohms. The cable length should be terminated at both ends by co-axial half-connectors. If no such connectors are available, the ccnnection should be made by means of a.similar length of cable, connecting its inner wire to the centres of the power meter and the transmitter half-connectors, while the screening sheath should be connected to the "earth" of the meter and transmitter half-connector. A simplified lay-out of the measuring circuit is shown in Figure 4. 11.0 SECRET / The input 50X1-HUM 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? -173- 50X1-HUM The input impedance of the meter should be 75 ohms; the power is read off direct from the meter scale, in Watts. If the input impedance of the meter is lower, and is 50 ohms, then a non-inductive resistor of a value of 25 ohms should be connected in series to the power meter (to the central wire of the half-connector) while the cable screen should be connected to the "earth" of the meter. A simplified lay-out of this arrangement is shown in Figure 5. The read-off power should be calculated from the formula: Pdz where: P . true power of the transmitter; Pdz = numbsr of divisions oa the power meter scale. (b) Measurement with the help of a milliammeter: A simplified lay-out of the measurement circuit is shown in Figure 6. The connection should be made by means of a short length of co-axial cable of a wave impedance of 75 ohms, tho diameter of its cores being not less than 0.8 - 1.0 mms. The connections should be kept as short as possible. The measurement should be made with a milliammeter with a thermo- couple, with a measurement range not less than 200 ma, and an accuracy not less than ?510. The power should be calculated from the formula: rated level. P 12 . R ;tore: P . power in Watts; I . measured current, in Amperes, R = 75-ohm resistor. During the measurement, the supply voltages should be at the In principle, the measurement should be made with the millia- mmeter. The results of the measurement should be entered in Table 2. (SECRET /Table 2. 50X1-HUN 50X1 narlaccifiPri in Part - Sanitized Com/ Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? - 174 - Table 2 50X1 -HUM No. Factory No. of half-set of tle radio- relay Wave No. I in A R in ohms P in W Temp. o Humidity 4. Checking the calibration of the transmitter 73. The calibration error and the re-setting of the transmitter frequency is described in point 18 of the W-2, according to which the o o error should not exceed -6 kcis at a temperatre of +20 C. ?5 C. In order to check the transmitter calibration, one should use an interference wavemeter, quartz-stabilised, with an accuracy not less + ?3 than +1 . In order to make this measurement, the transmitter should be set to the wavelength the accuracy of which is to be checked. The trans- mitter should then be put on load with a dummy aerial (75 ohms), and should be lightly coupled (by means of a wire loop) with the interference wave- meter, as shown in Figure 7, where: G.3Z. = wide-band oscillator G.W. = narrow-band oscillator fx = frequency being measured fez = wide-band oscillator frequency fw = narrow-band oscillator frequency 81 . earphones ffalomierz = WaveLleter; Polkomplet radiolinii = Half-se7b7 The principle of measurement on this type of wavemeter is as follows: the frequency being measured, fx, is fed to the input of the wavemeter, while the wide-band oscillator G.Z. of the wavemeter is set in such a way as to obtain a zero beat in the earphones. 40 SECRET 50X1 -HUM /This gives ....50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? 175 ? 50X1-HUM This gives an approximate indication of the frequency of the transmitter being tested. Next, one should disconnect the measured frequency fx, and connect ip the narrow-band oscillator GIN, setting it to zero beat with the frequency of the wide-band oscillator. One must next determine what multiple of the wide-band generator frequency fsz (and therefore of the measured fi.equency fx) is the narrow-band oscillator frequency Lw. For this purpose, one should divide the approximate frequency fsz by the frequency Lw. The quotient n obtained from the division is the required multiple, which should be a whole number. If the quotient is a fraction, one should take the nearest whole number. In order to determine accurately the frequency being measured, the indicated frequency Lw of the narrow-band oscillator should be multi- plied by the calculated multiple n. For example: fsz = 69.8 mc/s Lw = 3172 kc/s n = fsz = 69800 = 22.04 Lw 3172 If we take n = 22, therefore the measured frequency fx is: Lx = 22 . Lw = 22 . 3172 . 69,784 Mc/s. In certain cases this multiple is already calculated and shown on the instrument scale; if this is so, then it is not necessary to calculate the multiple. Knowing the nominal frequency of the transmitter, corresponding to the wavelength being measured, it is possible to determine the frequency deviation from the relationship fn - fx. Thus: fn 69,975 Mc/s Lx = 69,971 Ific/s fn fx = 4 kcfs 51197 where: fn = nominal frequency. 4110SECRET 50X1 /The nominal 50X1-HUM narlaccifiPci in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part- Sanitized Copy Approved forRelease2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 et SECRET ? ? ? ? 50X1-HUM -176- The nominal frequency of the radio-relay, corresponding to the wave-length being measured, is calculated from the equation: fn (Mc/s) = 66 + 75 (N-1) . 10-3 where: N = number of the wave. For instance, for wave No. N.26: fn = 66 75 . 25 . 10-3 = 67,875 Mc/s If the calibration and frequency resetting error, at a temp- + o erature of +2J C ?5 C9 exceeds kc/s, the radio-relay station should be returned to the workshops for calibration correction. Before beginning the measurement, the narrow-band oscillator should be calibrated in the range of the frequency measured, with the help of a quartz oscillator located in the wavemeter. In view of the fact that the measurement is fairly complicated, before beginning the measurement one should acquaint oneself with the wavemeter operating instructions, which should be carefully adhered to. The measurement way be made with the wavemeter-oscillator taken from the "WILGA" measuring kit. The results obtained should be entered in Table 3. Table 3. No. Factory No. of half-set , Wave No. fw Mo/s fx fn-fx Mcis kc/s i Temp. ?C. Humidity % 1 5. Checking the calibration of the receiver 74. The error in calibration and in the resetting of the frequency of the receiver is defined in paragraph 29 of the WT. According to this, the error should not exceed ?6 kc/s at a temperature of +20?C ?5?C. In order to make the measurement, one should connect up to the interference wavemeter the input of the receiver, from which, thanks to the reverse radiation 5romieniowanie wsteczng of the heterodyne, a 4'signal is fed to the wavemeter input. SECRET 50X1-HUM / The wavemeter 50X1 I I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 411111FSECRET -177- 50X1-HUM The wavemeter should be set to a frequency lower by 6.6 Mc/s from the frequency of the heterodyne. The connection should be rade by means Of a co-axial cable, as shown :!.n Figure 8. If a co-axial cable is not available, the connection may be made by means of a short conductor. The transmitter should be switched off (with the "Dyzur - Praca" 5Stand by - Operationg switch in the position "Stand by"). The receiver AFC should be switched off (the "APCz - Wylaczone" switch in the position "Wylaczone" L70ff7), and the quartz calibrator should also be switched off (the "Kalibrator - Wylaczone" switch in the "Wylaczone" f"Offg position). The wave of which the frequency i to be measured should be accurately set on the receiver scale, and the reA,eiver frequency deviation should be measured similarly as in the ease of the receiver (paragraph 73). In the event when the sensitivity of the wavemeter is too weak, and it is not possible to obtain a beat of its frequency with the frequency of the receiver, originating from the reverse radiation of the heterodyne, the transceiver block should be taken out of the housing of the half-set. One should then connect up the supply voltage by means of extension cables, remove the plate screening the resonance circuits located at the bottom of the transceiver block (see the wring diagram of the HF amplifier circuits) and couple the wavemeter, by means of a co-axial cable (or a conductor) to the capacitor C44 (20pF), as shown in Figure 9. The coupling should be minimal, so as not to influence the frequency of the heterodyne through the anode circuit of the heterodyne, L12, C43. In order to obtain a minimal coupling, the co-axial cable (or insulated conductor) should be placed at a certain distance from the capacitor C44, and then moved further from it so that a beat can still be obtained in the earphones of the wavemeter, lECRET w 50X1-HUM / Since the .... 50X1 neclassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? 178 50X1-HUM Since the heterodyne Is operating at a frequency 6.6 Mc lower than the frequency of the transmitter oscillator, one should set on the wavemeter a frequency 6.6 Mc/s lower than the frequency set on the receiver cale. The measurement of the deviation of the receiver frequency should be carried out in the same way as for the transmitter (paragraph 73). The readings obtained from the measurements should be entered in Table 3. 6. Checking receiver sensitivity 75. The receiver sensitivity is laid down in paragraph 25 of the WT, according to which the sensitivity, at a frequency deviation of 6 kc/s at the nominal output level and a Signal-to-noise ratio of 201, should not be worse than 211V in the entire frequency range in both telephone channels. In order to make this measurement, one should connect to the receiver input the output of the HF oscillator, with an output resistance of 75 ohms, using a co-axial cable, as shown in Figure 10. The oscillator should make it possible to carry out a smooth regulation of the output voltage from 1 P. V, and should be tunable within a frequency range corresponding to that of the R-401 radio-relay station, i.e. within a range of 66 to 70 Mc/s. This measurement may be made by means of the wavemeter- oscillator taken from the "WILGA" measuring kit. The switches "2TF - 4TG 4TF" in Block 2 should be set to "2TF", and the transmitter should be switched off (the "Praca - Dyzur"25peration - Stand byf switch in the position "Stand by"). A 600-ohm resistor should be connected to the terminals 1-2 of the first telephone channel (or 5-6 of the second telephone channel) on the line panel. Parallel with it, one should connect a thermionic voltmeter, capable of measurements from 1 mV to 1 V, with an accuracy not less than ? + 51b. SIR:311E1r Selectin 50X1 50X1-HUN Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 1 ? ?179- 50X1 -HUM Selecting any wave, one should feed to the input of the receiver from the HF oscillator a signal of a deviation of 6 kc/s. One should then accurately tune the oscillator frequency to the receiver frequency, at a maxinum deflection of the thermionic voltmeter pointer. Using potentiometer "I" or "II" in Block 2 (for the first or second channel respectively), adjust the level in such a way that the volt? meter will indicate 105 mV. Next, switch off the HF oscillator and measure with the voltmeter the receiver noise level. Switch on the oscillator once more, without carrier wave modulation, and, using the knob for the smooth adjustment of the output voltage of the oscillator, set the voltage in such a way that the noise level Us, measured with the voltmeter, is 20 times smaller from the Usz noise level measured without the oscillator carrier wave. The oscillator voltage, in microvolts, at which the signal? to?noise ratio is 20, will correspond to the receiver sensitivity. In the event of using HF oscillators of an output impedance of 50 ohms, one should connect up to the oscinator, in series, a non? inductive resistor of 25 ohms, as shown in Figure 11. The measurement should be made in the same way as in the case of using an oscillator with an outprt impedance of 75 ohms. The true sensitivity of the receiver is then calculated from the formula: Ug rz LJE =1.5 where: Ug . oscillator voltage read off from the scale of the smooth adjustment of the output voltage, at a signal?to?noise ratio of 20:1. Before be nning the measurement, one should carefully study the instructions for use of the HF oscillator. The measurement results should be entered in Table 4. 4111. SECRET /Table 4, 50X1 -HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? SECRET ?180? Table 4 No. Factory No. of half?set Wave No. Usz mV Us mV Ugrz Us Temp. ?C. Humidity % Usz " 50X1-HUM 7. Checking the automatic frequency control of the receiver 76. The range of the receiver AFC is dc)scribed in paragraph 36, according to which this control should ensure the reduction of the receiver frequency detuning in relation to the signal frequency by not less than 7 times, at a detuning not exceeding ?25 kc/s. In order to coTry out this measurement, the tranIceiver block should be removed from the half?set housing. , Conm_.ct up the supply voltage by means of extensien cables, determine 0 ? okreslic, perhaps misprint for lodkrecicy ? unscre27 the screening plate of the discriminator circuits (see the wiring diagram of the IF amplifier systems) and connect up the thermionic voltmeter to the points A ? B, as shown in Figure 12. The volt? meter should be capable of measuring d.c. voltages from 1 V, and should have an accuracy not less than 1.5%. The HF oscillator should be connected to the receiver input (as shown in Figure 10), making it possible to take readings of the frequency deviation of up to 25 kc/s from the rated frequency of the oscillator. In the absence of such an oscillator, connect up the interference wavemeter used for testing the HF transmitter and receiver. The measurement may be made with the wavemeter?oscillator from the "WILGA" measuring kit. Switch off the quartz calibrator and the AFC (the switches "Kalibrator ? Wylaczone" and "APCZ Wylaczone" should be set to the "Wylaczone",trOffff7 position). Switch off the transmitter (set the switch 50X1-HUM / from "Praca ? 401111010SECRE' 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 411111 SECRET - 181 - 50X1-HUM from "Praca25peration7 to "Dyzur"25tand by"7). Set any wave number on the receiver scale and, using the HF oscillator, tune up to the receiver frequency, so that the pointer of the thermionic voltmeter, connected up at poilts A - B9 will deflect to zero. Next, detune by means of the oscillator by 25 kc/s (in either direction), and note the value of the voltage U1 measured with the volt- meter at points A - B. Switch on the AFC (setting the "APCz - Wylaczone" switch to "APC' f7AF0E7),_ and note the value of the voltage 2L, U2. d = Ul A 2 where: U1 . value of voltage at the discriminator output, when detuned from the nominal frequency by 25 kc/s measured without AFC; U2 = voltage value at the same degree of detuning, measured with the AFC switched on. This value should not be less than 7. The results of the measurements should be entered in Table 5. No. Factory No. of half-set Wave No. U1 V U2 V U1 Temp. oC. Humi- dity % 8. Checking the levels in the -telephone channels 77. The value of the levels of the telephone channels is defined in paragraph 21 of WT. With a two-wire connection, the relative levels should be: - input: 285 mV (-1 N); - output: 105 mV (-2 N); 111110 SECRET / while it 50X1-HUM 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 41, SECRET - 1i2 - 50X1 -HUM while it is permissible to tolerate variations in the output level within limits of 86 ? 129 mV (?0.2 N). With a four-wire connection, without the translation of the magneto call, the appropriate levels should be: - inputs 520 mV (-0.4 N); - output: 520 mV (-0.4 N) while it is permissible to tolarate variations in the output level within limits of 425 - 635 mV (t0.2 N). With a four-wire connection, with the translation of the magneto call, the appropriate levels should be: - input: 190 mV (-1.A N); output: 190 my (-1.4 N); while it is permissible to tolerate variations in the output level within limits of 157 - 233 mV (?0.2 N). 78. In order to carry out the measurement of levels with a two-wire connection, the switches "2TF - 4TG - 4TF" in Block 2 should be set to the position "2TF". The transmitter and receiver of the two half-sets should be tuned to the same wavelength, and should be put on load with dummy aerials. Connect up to the terminals 1 - 2 of the first telephone channel (or 5 ? 6 of the second telephone channel) an acoustic generator of an output resistance of 600 ohms, from which should be supplied a level of 285 mV? of a frequency of 800 c/s. ? The accuracy of the generator should not be less than ?5%. Connect up a 600-ohm resistor to the terminals 1 - 2 (or 5 ? 6) on the line panel of the second half-set. In parallel with it, connect up a thermionic voltmeter capable of measuring acoustic voltages from 100 mV to 700 mV, with an accuracy not less than ?5%. The voltage should be 105 mV, with permissible variation between 86 ? 129 mV. 50X1 -HUM A simplified lay-out of the connections is shown in Figure 13. Note: In order to prevent the bell from ringing during he measure- ment, one should remove the calling relay from the reception channel being tested. 41111101ECR!T /79. 1 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? SECRET - 183 - 50X1 -HUM 79. In order to carry out the measurement of levels with a four- wire connection, without translation of the magneto call, the switches "2TF - 4TG - 4TF" in Block 2 should be switched to the position "4TG". Connect un an acoustic generator to terminals 3--4 of the first telephone channel (or 7 - 8 of the second telephone channel) on the line panel of one half-bet, and feed a level of 520 mV of a frequency of 800 c/s. The output level should be measured on terminals 1 - 2 (or 5 - 6) on the line panel of the second half-set, the level should be 520 mV, with a permissible variation within limits of 425 - 635 mV. The lay-out of the connections to the line panels is shown in Figure 14. 80. In order to carry out the measurement of levels with a four- wire connection, with the translation of the magneto call, the switches "2TF - 4TG 4TF" in Block 2 should be set to the position "4TF", and the measurement made as in the case of a four-wire connection without the translation of the magneto call. The input should be fed with a level of 190 mV, with a frequency of 800 cis. The output level should be 190 mV, with a permissible variation between 157 - 233 mV. The results obtained from the three readings should be entered in Table 6. Table 6. Factory No. I No. of half-set Wave No. Channel I Type of IChannel II Tamp. o C. Humi- dity 0 oper. Uwej Uwyj mV mV Uwej Uwyj mV mV fiwej . input voltage; Uwyj . output voltage7 4111110SECRET /9. 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? ? ? 411111 SECRET - 184 50X1-HUM 9. Checking the cross-talk attenuation in telephone channels. 81. The extent of the cross-talk attenuation is laid down in the general requirements of WT, sec. D and E, according to which the absolute level of intelligible cross-talk in both telephone channels without retrans- lation should not be greater than 0.7 mV (-7 N). The absolute level of unintelligible cross-talk in both the telephone channels without retranslation should not be greater than 5.2 mV (-5 N). In order to carry out this measurement, the switches "2TF - 4TG 4TF" in Block 2 should be set to "2TF". Connect a.5coustiE7 generator of an output impedance of 600 ohms to terminals 1 - 2 of the first telephone channel on the line panel of one half-set, and connect a 600-ohm resistor to terminals 5 ? 6 of the same half set, as shown in Figure 15. On the line panel of the second half-set, connect a 600-ohm resistor to terminals 1 2, and, parallel with this resistor, connect to terminals 5 ? 6 a harmonic analyser, or a selective level indicator, capable of measuring voltages from 0.1 mV$ at a frequency of 400 - 3000 c/s. Before making these connections, the transmitters and receivers of both the half sets should be put on load with dummy aerials. One should also set the normal frequency deviation at nominal input and output levels, in accordance with the table affixed to the panel of the half-set, as described in paragraph 36. Feed a level of 285 mV from the acoustic generator, and carry out the measurement of the level on terminals 5 ? 6 of the second half-set using the harmonic analyser. The measurement should be made on several frequencies, in the 400 - 2500 cis band. Before making the measurements, one should study the operating instructions of the harmonic analyser (or selective level indicator). 50X1-HUM / In the absence.. 4411111104ECRET 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 11110 SECRET ? ? ? 185 ? 50X1-HUM In the absence of such an analyser, one may connect a thermionic voltmeter, capable of measurements from 0.1 mV, and of an accuracy not less 4 than ?570. The results of the measurements should be entered in Table 7. Table 7. N o. Factory No. Modulation of half?set frequency cis Uwej I (II) mV Uwyj II (I) mV Temp, ?C. Humidity % 10. Checking the distortion 2f_Llagraphic channels 82. The distortions of telegraphic channels are defined in paragraph 35 of?the WT. The error in the setting of telegrallic channels to the minimum distortion by means of the instrument for adjusting telegraphic channels and relays should not exceed 10%. This condition should 5is.s7 apply to any RP-4 relays fulfilling the technical requiements. The transmitter and receiver should be put on load with dummy aerials and the power should be switched on. The measurement of the Oistortion should be done with a strobo? scope, the transmitting section of which should be connected to terminals 11 of the first telegraphic channel on the line panel of one half?set. The receiving section should be connected to terminal 12 (or 14) of the other half?set, as shown in Figure 16. In addition, the switches "Bodo ? Simpleks St-35" and "Kontrola ? Praca" of the appropriate channel should be set to "Bodo" fBauaot2/ and "Praca" foperationf. The measurement should be made in accordance with the strobo? scope instructions. In the absence of a stroboscope, one should use the instrument for adjusting telegraphic channels and relays, and the measurement should be made as detailed in paragraph 47. 50X1-HUM 11111PSECRET /The results ... 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? 41111111SECRET ;- 186 - 50X1 -HUM The results of the mc,asurements should be entered in Table 8. Table 8 No. Factory Nos. of half-sets Wave No. Distortion % Temp. o C Humidity % Chan. I Chan. II 11. Checking the resistance of the mains circuit insulation in relation to the earth potential of the radio- relay station. 81 The resistance of the mains circuit insulation in relation to the earth potential of the radio-relay station should not be less than ? 500 kilohms at an ambient temperature of 20?C ?5?C and a relative humidity of 95% t3%. In normal conditions of use, i.ee at an ambient temperature of 20?C ?5?C, and a relative humidity of 65 - 75%, this resistance should not be less than 2 megohms. In order to carry out this measurement, one should use an in- ductor megger producing a voltage not less than 500 V, which is connected into the circuit as shown in Figure 17. Disconnect the mains cable from the motor vehicle; connect one terminal of the megger to one of the two knife contacts of the cable connector on the wall of the vehicle labelled "127-220", or to the mains socket inside the vehicle. The second megger terminal should be connected to the vehicle frame. Turn the handle of the megger and read off the value of the insulation resistance. The readings obtained should be entered in Table 9. /Table 9 ECRET 50X1 -HUM 50X1 I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? ? 4OFSECRET ?187? Table 9 50X1-HUM No. Factory No. of half-set Insulation resistance ?in megohms Teomp. C Humidity . % 84. The radio-relay station may be regarded as technically efficient if all the parameters measured fulfil the conditions laid down in Chapter I of the present "Method of Inspection". 50X1-HUM 11.11P?' SECRET /Chapter IV 50X1 r Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1-HUM CHAFER IV Final Remarks 85. The results of technical inspections are entered in the signals equipment inspection books, kept up in accordance with para. 365 of Signals Regulations 87/59. 86. Having completed the technical control on the basis of the results of the measurements entered in Tables I - 9, one draws up a Certificate E"Protokor] as indicated in the pro-forma below. 87. The inspections (carried out in full) and technical controls are also recorded in the equipment log-book. ? ? 11110pSECRET dimianig omit Pr-forma 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 -189- Pro-forma of Certificate CERTIFICATE Nbe 00,e0 50X1-HUM concerning the completion of technical control of the R-401 radiorelay set, drawn up on Commission consisting of: 19 0, at (name of unit), by a Chairman: Members : appointed by virtue of Order Noe issued by (state authority) on 19 The Commission, composed as above, has carried out a control of (number) of R-401 radio-relay stationso The control included: 10 An inspection of the radio-relay station 2,, The measurement of the following parameters: - energy drawn from batteries; - energy drawn from the mains; - BF power of transmitter; - calibration of HF transmitter; calibration of BF receiver; - receiver sensitivity; receiver AFC; - levels in telephone channels; - cross-talk attenuation in telephone channels; - distortion in telegraphic channels; - resistance of mains circuit insulation in relation to the earth potential of the radio-relay station; - measuring circuits; 50X1-HUM 411111PSECRET Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 SECRET -190- measuring instruments used; - short description of measurements carried out; - tables of results obtained. 50X1-HUM Final Conclusions The Certifidate should end with final contlusions. These shoUld state how many radio-relay stations have fulfilled the technical requirements. Give factory numbers of the relay stations which have-fail- ed to come up to the WT standard. Give an assessment of the technical condition of the radio-relay stations examined, and the state of their maintenance and operational capabilities undar actual operating conditions. Give recommendations for the removal of shortcomings and faults which have come to light. Signatures of commission: 41110*SECRET 50X1-HUM 50X1 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 WV'S I I IVIVI #.a,J # "1 ? a AO: 9, ?Per 1;* If* ?. 4th .r.e SECRET at. .440 41. .0 a. .10 WI" MN, ? NW 1) 1 i ? f Q V 0 L. 0 tv.. ....4.,...0.,,,!".?? ?4,,,,,,,,,,,,...,?...,,,,....nov:0-.. - ' ' ? 4 1) V AO ; . w? rtk.e.... ?. 45 ?hasossila '? a.... Ziet 1 s e 4. 09 agla 1,, lp , ,, ,,,,,,,,,,no,......,.......,,,s,..., r 44,041.4%, .? .............. ? (I).0. S? VA ., ?? . ? ' . ; 1. I ..... 40 + tawi nyz. I Fire 1 KEY: (1) Sz-8 cable; (2) To charging panel; (3) Group III - Group II - Croup I. R ys. 2 Figure 2 ? () :'.7!,'.70,e,fo.wviiivliFieftwitt.k 72/477/470%1ZOLMY(3) %7s.3 ? IF Figure 3 KEY: (1) Cable from mains; (2) Input panel on cabin wall of truck; (3) 220 V mains supply panel. SECRET 50X1 -HUM I Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 HUM ? 4; 21rr,:z.il Rys. 4, 0") Figure 4 KEY: HF power meter; (2) Transmitter; (3) Receiver; /4. Half-set of radio relay; (5) 75 ohms. I 7't AT (I) Rys. 5 17;iirMAN 1g1'444e. (4-) Figure 5 KEY: HF power meter; (2) Transmitter; (3) Receiver; 4. Half-set of radio relay. ? Figure 6 KEY: (1) Transmitter; (2) Receiver; (3) Half-set of radio relay. 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 50X1-HUM (6)4:p *746 (.4 c!! 0. 0 (9) (to) Figure 7 KEY: 1 Dummy aerial, 75 ohms; ( 4 Half-set of radio relay; 6 Narrow-band oscillator; oscillator frequency; (9) Na (10) Wavemeter. ? ittiir,VX147.1'" ( 4-) 2) Transmitter; (3) Receiv r; (5) Wide-band oscillator (7) Earphones; '(8) Wide-band rrow-band oscillator freggency; . ? 4 itatanAr 447;844d. , (3) ' Itys. 8 - - -- 8. KEY: 1 Transmitter;?(2,` Receiver; (3) Half-set of radio relay; 24. Wide-band oscillator; (5) Narrow-band oscillatOr;' 6 Earphones; (7) Wavereter. SECRIT 50X1-HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010061-5 OLUBUI ? ? 50X1 -HUM Rys. 9 (t) mat, Fi ure KEY: (1) To mixer; 2 Wide-band oscillator; (3) Narrow-band oscillator.; (4.) Earphones. ? .10 ='," Figure 10 KEY: Transmitter; 2 Receiver; (3) Half-set of radio relay; HF oscillator; (5) Thermionic voltmeter. SECRET 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release _2013/08/14 : CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 OLUIrILI ? ? ,.;.r.,1147:747 CI) , 50X1 -HUM &APAW Ara Rss. It k Figure 11 KEY: (1) To input half-connector of radio relay; (2) HF oscillator. Iftys 12 Figure 12 ICY: (1) To 12 amplifier; (J Thermionic voltmeter. SICRIT 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 ? Figure 13 KEY; (1) Dummy aerial, 75 oluns; (2) Transmitter; (3) Receiver; (4) R-401 Half-sets; (5) Acoustic generator; (6) Thermionic voltmeter. Vi.nr (1) RTS. 14 Figure 14. KEY; (1) Acouotic generator; (2) Thermionic voltmeter. Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5 .11,????????? avia7 im.Evov A:c.-1, NrreXti (I) Rys. momigt (I) Fi ure 1 KEY: (1) Meager; 2 Input panel on cabin wall of truck. 50X1 -HUM Declassified in Part - Sanitized Copy Approved for Release 2013/08/14: CIA-RDP80T00246A031000010001-5